Home

Sepam series 20 - ElectricalManuals.net

Contents

1. Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE919 C onn ecti on m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block m L L 2 wire RS 485 signals m Shielding 2 wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply m to female 9 pin sub D connector m 2 wire RS 485 signals L L m distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V ACE919 Power supply m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block C m reversible phase and neutral ACE919CA m earthed via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case 2 wire RS 485 link without distributed ue supply DE51670 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 6 37 6 38 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use PCRED301005EN June 2005 Contents User Machine Interfaces SFT2841 setting and operating software Welcome window Presentation General screen organization Use of the software Configuration of a Sepam network UMI on front panel Presentation Advanced UMI Access to data White keys for current operation Blue keys for parameter and protection setting Data entry principles Default parameter setting Commissioning principles and method Testing and metering equipment required General examination and preliminary actions Checking of parameter and protection settings Checking of phase current input connection 1 A 5 A current transformers LPCT type current sensors Checking of residual current input connection Checking phase voltage
2. 3 36 S Merlin Gerin 100 00 1 000 00 Q Lo oO i 100 00 7 v v 10 00 4 N v curve T 1s vA N 10 00 x NN N N v 1 00 RI in N R inverse time SIT N N v 1 00 N N very inverse time VIT or KY y y Y extremely inverse EIT ultra inverse UIT I Is 0 10 1 10 100 IEEE curves IAC curves t s 1 000 00 O N lo o 100 00 3 VI a El 10 00 v Mi x N N N s N N N 1 00 IIs IIs 0 10 1 100 PCRED301005EN June 2005 MT10530 MT10531 Protection functions Curve equations IEC curve inverse type k T t D x a Ni B 1 Is IEC curve RI type 1 T ta 1 1 3 1706 0 339 0 236 I IEEE curve A T t D Bi x d l P B 1 ls IAC curve ty A B D E xT 10 I Is 0 1 IIs Example IDMT timer hold delay T1 PCRED301005EN June 2005 General IDMT protection functions Characteristic curves k a B IEC standard inverse A 0 14 0 02 2 97 IEC very inverse B 13 5 1 1 50 IEC long time inverse B 120 1 13 33 IEC extremely inverse C 80 2 0 808 IEC ultra inverse 315 2 2 5 1 Characteristic curves A B p B IEEE moderately
3. _ and wiring 1 With basic UMI 23 mm Cut out Cutout accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand For mounting plate between For mounting plate 3 17 mm 1 5 mm and 3 mm thick 0 125 inch thick DE50924 DE52187 202 0 162 Assembly with AMT840 mounting plate Used to mount Sepam at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI DSM303 DE51846 123 Sepam with basic UMI and MES114 mounted with AMT840 Mounting plate 2 mm thick AMT840 mounting plate 6 4 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation Base unit Assembly The Sepam is simply flush mounted and clamped without requiring any additional screw type fastening Mounting Present the product as D clamp indicated making sure the metal gt plate is correctly entered in the groove at the bottom 2 Tilt the product and press on the top part to clamp it with the clips DE51143 O TNs PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 6 5 DE51131 Installation 6 6 Base unit Connection Sepam components m base unit o A base unit connector power supply output relay CSH30 120 200 or ACE990 input Screw type connector shown CCA620 or ring lug connector CCA622 o 1 5 A CT current input connector CCA630 or LPCT current input connector CCA670 or voltage input connector CCT6
4. PCRED301005EN June 2005 gt I Ilb Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS Setting examples For an overload of 2 Ib the value t T1 0 0339 2 is obtained In order for Sepam to trip at the point 1 t 70 s T1 is equal to 2065 sec 34 min With a setting of T1 34 min the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state point 2 In this case it is equal to t T1 0 3216 gt t 665 sec i e 11 min which is compatible with the thermal resistance of the motor when cold The negative sequence factor is calculated using the equation defined on page 3 13 The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set They are not taken into account by default Example 3 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax Ib 1 1 Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax Ib 120 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I lb 0 95 The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after 100 s point 1 With t T1 0 069 I lb 2 and Es2 120 gt T1 100 s 0 069 1449 sec 24 min The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to t T1 0 3567 gt t 24 min 0 3567 513 s point 2 This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 s point 2 If the ti
5. Time tagging is carried out systematically Chronological sorting of the time tagged events is performed by the remote monitoring and control system Time tagging Sepam time tagging uses absolute time see section on date and time When an event is detected it is tagged with the absolute time given by Sepam s internal clock All the Sepam internal clocks must be synchronized so as to avoid drifts and all be the same to allow inter Sepam chronological sorting Sepam has two mechanisms for managing its internal clock E time setting for initializing or modifying the absolute time A special Modbus message called time message is used to time set each Sepam E synchronization to avoid Sepam internal clock drifts and ensure inter Sepam synchronization Internal clocks can be synchronized according to two principles E internal synchronization via the communication network without any additional cabling m external synchronization via a logic input with additional cabling At the time of commissioning the user sets the synchronization mode parameter PCRED301005EN June 2005 Time tagging of events Initialization of the time tagging function Each time the communication system is initialized energizing of Sepam the events are generated in the following order E appearance of data loss m appearance of incorrect time E appearance of not synchronous m disappearance of data loss The functio
6. ef Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation LPCT sensor block and connection diagram The 3 LPCT current transformers are connected to the CCA670 connector mounted in the rear panel of Sepam item The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into the failsafe position CCA670 connector parameter setting The CCA670 connector should be calibrated at the time of Sepam commissioning according to the following instructions m use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the LPCT settings zone the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1 L2 L3 m onthe L1 block set the microswitch that corresponds to the selected rated current to 1 2 ratings possible for each position O the rated current should be the same as the one set in Sepam General characteristics menu via the SFT2841 software tool Current sensors screen with advanced UMI O leave the 7 other microswitches set to 0 m set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as block L1 and close the shield CCA613 remote test plug The CCA613 test plug panel mounted on the front of the cubicle and fitted with a 2 meter cord is used to transfer data from the integrated test plug to the CCAG670 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam Phase DE50564 Output ACE917 Adapter Injection box 1Aor5A Accessory connection principle
7. 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 Vnp 5 from 0 015 to 0 05 Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 V or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp V3 Positive sequence voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the positive sequence voltage Vd Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 2 at Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 V or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp V3 J Merlin Gerin 2 7 Metering functions 2 8 Frequency Temperature Frequency Operation This function gives the frequency value Frequency is measured via the following m based on U21 if only one phase to phase voltage is connected to the Sepam m based on positive sequence voltage if the Sepam includes U21 and U32 measurements Frequency is not measured if m the voltage U21 or positive sequence voltage Vd is less than 40 of Un m the frequency is outside the measurement range Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the
8. The configuration for the physical layer of the ACE969FO fiber optic port is completed with the following 2 parameters E link idle state light on or light off m echo mode with or without Default value Light Off No Authorized values Light Off or Light On Yes fiber optic ring or No fiber optic star Note in echo mode the Modbus master will receive the echo of its own request before the slave s reply The Modbus master must be able to disregard this echo Otherwise it is impossible to create a Modbus fiber optic ring Fiber optic parameters Link idle state Echo mode PCRED301005EN June 2005 PE50585 PE50586 Modbus communication MODBUS advanced parameters Remote Control Hode C Select Before Operate SFT2841 Modbus advanced parameters window Lamera rra oe ee Lar da maa U pyi Ligh SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE969FO PCRED301005EN June 2005 Configuring the communication interfaces Configuring Modbus advanced parameters The Sepam remote control mode is selected from the Advanced parameters window Advanced parameters Authorized values Default value Remote control mode Direct or SBO Select Direct Before Operate mode Configuring the physical layer of the ACE969 E LAN port The E LAN port on the ACE969TP and ACE969FO communication interfaces is a 2 wire RS 485 port The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the E LAN port are m Sepam addr
9. m the SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all Sepam users It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests The tests described in this document are systematically based on the use of that tool The commissioning tests may be performed without the SFT2841 software for Sepam units with advanced UMIs Method For each Sepam m only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the functions activated A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on m use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests J Merlin Gerin 7 21 Commissioning 7 22 Testing and metering equipment required Generators m sinusoidal AC current generator O 50 or 60 Hz frequency according to the country O single phase type adjustable from O to 50 Arms O with connector suited to the built in test terminal box in the current input connection diagram m sinusoidal AC voltage generator O 50 or 60 Hz frequency according to the country O single phase type adjustable from O to 150 Vrms O with connector suited to the built in test terminal box in the voltage input connection diagram m DC voltage generator O adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC O for adaptation to the voltage level of the input being tested O with electric cord and clamps wire grip or touch probes Metering devices m 1 ammeter O to 50 Arms m 1 voltmeter O to 150 V rms Comput
10. response time deine Access to the protection setting or parameter setting modes is disabled m by pressing the key m automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5 minutes 7 18 Advanced UMI Data entry principles Modification of passwords Only the parameter setting qualification level 2 keys or the SFT2841 allow modification of the passwords Passwords are modified in the general settings screen key Loss of passwords If the factory set passwords have been modified and the latest passwords entered have been irretrievably lost by the user please contact your local after sales service representative Entry of parameters or settings Principle applicable to all Sepam screens example of phase overcurrent protection m enter the password m access the corresponding screen by successively pressing the Y key m move the cursor by pressing the V key for access to the desired field e g curve m press the key to confirm the choice then select the type of curve by pressing they or key and confirm by pressing the key E press the v key to reach the following fields up to the apply box Press the amp key to confirm the setting Entry of numerical values e g Current threshold value m position the cursor on the required field using they A keys and confirm the choice by pressing the amp key m select the first digit to be entered and set the value by pressing the ATY keys
11. 1 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 55 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Vns0 is one of the general settings PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 27 Protection functions Starts per hour ANSI code 66 Operation This function is three phase It picks up when the number of starts reaches the following limits m maximum number of starts allowed per period of time P Nt m maximum allowed number of consecutive hot starts Nh m maximum allowed number of consecutive cold starts Nc The function indicates m the number of starts still allowed before the maximum if the protection has not picked up The number of starts depends on the motor s thermal state m waiting time before a start is allowed if the protection has picked up Starting is detected when the current consumed becomes greater than 10 of the lb Current User information The following information is available for the user m the waiting time before a start is allowed m the number of starts still allowed See chapter Machine operation assistance functions The number of consecutive starts is the number starts counted during the last P Nt minutes Nt being the number of starts allowed per period The motor hot state corresponds to the overshooting of the fixed set point 5
12. Maximum distance between sensor and module 1 km Wiring precautions m it is preferable to use shielded cables The use of unshielded cables may cause measurement errors which vary in degree on the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance m only connect the shielding at the MET 148 2 end in the shortest manner possible to the corresponding terminals of connectors and m do not connect the shielding at the RTD end Accuracy derating according to wiring The error At is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross section L km m 2 1 C km for 0 93 mm cross section At C 2x Saal m 1 C km for 1 92 mm cross section fq Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Mt11009 DE51650 DE52182 Installation MSA141 analog output module PCRED301005EN June 2005 MSA141 Analog output module Function The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal m selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting m 0 10 mA 4 20 mA 0 20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting m scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement Example the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0 10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is O minimum value 0 O maximum value 3000 m asingle module for each Sepam base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 CC
13. 0089h 0090h The master necessarily reads a block of 33 words starting at the address 0040h 0070h or one word at the address 0040h 0070h 5 18 ef Merlin Gerin Time tagging of events Exchange word The exchange word is used to manage a special protocol to be sure not to lose events following a communication problem The event table is numbered for this purpose The exchange word includes two fields m most significant byte exchange number 8 bits 0 255 Exchange number 0 255 Description of the MS byte of the exchange word The exchange number contains a numbering byte which identifies the exchanges The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized When it reaches its maximum value FFh it automatically returns to 0 Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering m least significant byte number of events 8 bits 0 4 07 o6 Jos b04 Jos poz b01 s00 Number of events 0 4 Description of LS byte of the exchange word Sepam indicates the number of significant events in the event table in the least significant byte of the exchange word Each non significant event word is initialized to zero Event table acknowledgment To inform Sepam that the block read by the master has been correctly received the master writes the number of the last exchange made in the Exchange number field and resets the Number of events field of the exchange word to zer
14. 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 6 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Phase to neutral undervoltage ANSI code 27S Operation This protection is three phase m it picks up when one of the 3 phase to neutral voltages drops below the Vs set point m it has 3 independent outputs available for the control matrix E it is operational if the number of VTs connected is V1 V2 V3 or U21 U32 with measurement of VO Block diagram V1 V1 lt Vs time delayed output MT10874 4 O V2 V2 lt Vs time delayed output V3 V3 lt Vs time delayed output gt 1 pick up signal Characteristics Vs set point Setting 5 Vnp to 100 Vnp Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 Vnp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 2 5 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 7 Protection functions ANSI code 37 Operation Block diagram This protection is single phase m it picks up when phase 1 current drops below the Is set point m it is inactive when the current is less than 10 of Ib m it is insensitive to current drops breaking due to circuit breaker tripping m it includes a definite time delay T DE50367 i Characteristic
15. 8 RTDs 38 49T Oo Oo Metering Phase current 11 12 I3 RMS residual current 10 E E E Demand current l1 12 18 peak demand current IM1 IM2 IM3 E E E Voltage U21 U32 U13 V1 V2 V3 residual voltage VO E E Positive sequence voltage Vd rotation direction E a Frequency E E Temperature Oo o Network and machine diagnosis Tripping current Tripl1 Tripl2 Tripl3 TriplO E E E Unbalance ratio negative sequence current li E E E Disturbance recording m E m m E Thermal capacity used E m Remaining operating time before overload tripping E E Waiting time after overload tripping E E Running hours counter operating time E E Starting current and time E Start inhibit time E Number of starts before inhibition Switchgear diagnosis Cumulative breaking current E E E Trip circuit supervision o Oo Oo Oo Oo Number of operations operating time charging time Oo o o Control and monitoring ANSI code Circuit breaker contactor control 94 69 o o o o o Latching acknowledgement 86 m a a m E Logic discrimination 68 o o o Switching of groups of settings m 2 m 2 m 2 Annunciation 30 a a E E E Additional modules 8 temperature sensor inputs MET148 2 module m o 1 low level analog output MSA141 module Oo Oo Oo Oo Oo Logic inputs outputs o m o Oo Oo MES114 MES114E MES114F 101 40 module Communication interface Oo Oo o m m ACE949 2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m standard O according to parameter setting and MES114 MES
16. ACE969TP communication interface m the E LAN engineering local area network port reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software PE50470 There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces that have different S LAN ports m ACEQ69TP Twisted Pair for connection to an S LAN network using a two wire RS485 connection m ACE969FO Fiber Optic for connection to an S LAN network using a fiber optic connection star or ring The E LAN port is always a two wire RS485 connection PE50471 ACE969FO communication interface 6 30 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE51866 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Characteristics Technical characteristics Weight Assembly Power supply Operating temperature Power supply Voltage Range Maximum consumption Inrush current Acceptable ripple content Acceptable momentary outages Electrical interface Standard Distributed power supply Consumptionn Max number of Sepam units 0 285 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC 20 1 10 2W 3VA lt 10A100 us 12 20 ms EIA 4 wire RS 485 differential External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA in sending mode 25 Maximum length of 2 wire RS 485 network Number of Sepam units 5 10 20 25 Fiber optic interface
17. CO CD WD aaj aj Not managed R W 3 16 Not managed R 3 Value 0100 0 Idem FCO1 Idem FC02 0 Idem 0100 0 Init to O FCOO This zone is provided to ensure compatibility with existing equipment A more complete description is available starting at address FCOOh in the configuration zone or using the identification read function Events zone 1 Exchange word Event n 1 Event n 2 Event n 3 Event n 4 Word address 0040 0041 0048 0049 0050 0051 0058 0059 0060 See time tagging of events chapter for data format Events zone 2 Exchange word Event n 1 Event n 2 Event n 3 Event n 4 Word address 0070 0071 0078 0079 0080 0081 0088 0089 0090 See time tagging of events chapter for data format PCRED301005EN June 2005 First events zone The events zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Access Modbus function enabled Read write 3 6 16 Read 3 Read 3 Read 3 Read 3 Second events zone The events zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Access Modbus function enabled Read wr
18. EIT C DT or IDMT IAC I VI El Is set point 0 1 to 24 In 0 1 to 2 4 In DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMT Inst 0 05 s to 300s 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold IDMT IDMT reset time 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is 3 2 ef Merlin Gerin Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5sto20s PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Setting ranges ANSI 50N 51N or 50G 51G Earth fault Sensitive earth fault Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT IsO set point 0 1 to 15 InO Definite time 0 1 to 1 Ind IDMT Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold IDMT IDMT reset time ANSI 59 Overvoltage phase to phase 50 to 150 of Unp ANSI 59N Neutral voltage displacement 2 to 80 of Unp ANSI 66 Starts per hour Starts per period 1 to 60 Period Consecutive starts 1 to 60 Time between starts ANSI 81H Overfrequency 50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz ANSI 81L Underfrequency 45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz ANSI 81R Rate of change of frequency 0 1 to 10 Hz s 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 IsO Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5 sto 20s 0 05 s to 300 s 0 05 s to 300 s 1to6hr 0 to 90 mn 0 1 s to 300s 0 1 s to 300s Inst 0 15 s to 300 s PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin
19. Figure 2 hot cold curves not compatible with the motor s thermal resistance A 1 Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS Setting examples Use of the additional setting group When a motor rotor is locked or is turning very slowly its thermal behavior is different from that with the rated load In such conditions the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator For high power motors rotor overheating is most often a limiting factor The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no longer valid In order to protect the motor in this case excessive starting time protection may be used Nevertheless motor manufacturers provide the thermal resistance curves when the rotor is locked for different voltages at the time of starting the Figure 4 Locked rotor thermal resistance A Sepam cold curve 7 motor running locked rotor 5134 motor cold curve 2 400 a e TE motor hot curve p dp D O V D wen Sepam hot curve E o lt starting at Un starting at 0 9 Un 1 05 2 I Ib gt 1 1 2 Is I Ilb Figure 3 hot cold curves compatible with the thermal resistance motor running motor s thermal resistance via the setting of an plea FERA motor stopped initial heat rise EsO D a aeae A starting at 80 Un starting at 100 Un adjusted Sepam cold curve In order to take these curves into acco
20. Passwords tab m via the Identification function in the Sepam menu m via the Identification icon The return to Operating mode function in the Passwords tab removes access rights to parameter and protection setting mode Downloading of parameters and protection settings Parameter and protection setting files may only be downloaded in the connected Sepam in Parameter setting mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for downloading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows m activate the Download Sepam function in the Sepam menu m select the rpg file which contains the data to be downloaded m acknowledge the end of operation report Return to factory settings This operation is only possible in Parameter setting mode via the Sepam menu All of the Sepam general characteristics protection settings and the control matrix go back to the default values Uploading of parameter and protection settings The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file may only be uploaded in Operating mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for uploading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows m activate the Upload Sepam function in the Sepam menu m select the rpg file that is to contain the uploaded data m acknowledge the end of operation report Local operation of Sepam Connected to Sepam SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available
21. front of the advanced UMI or in SFT2841 m latching contactor with shunt trip coil Two breaking device control modes are available m use of operating mechanism integrated in the circuit breaker contactor This logical function processes all the circuit breaker closing and tripping conditions based on O breaking device status information O remote control orders O protection functions O specific program logic for each application e g recloser O etc This function also inhibits closing of the breaking device according to the operating conditions m use of customized program logic A control and monitoring resource assignment matrix may be used to create customized program logic Operating mechanism integrated in the circuit breaker contactor For operation in accordance with the block diagram the Sepam must have the logic inputs required an MES114 module must therefore be included and the related parameter setting and wiring must be done Remote tripping Circuit breaker contactor tripping may be controlled remotely via the communication link The circuit breaker contactor tripping order may be activated at any time and is not inhibited by logic input 125 Circuit breaker contactor closing orders and Sepam acknowledgment via the communication link may be inhibited by logic input 125 Circuit breaker contactor control with lockout function ANSI 86 The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout rel
22. inverse 8 The setting of the timer hold curve is encoded as follows 0 definite time 1 IDMT 4 The H2 restraint variable is encoded as follows 0 H2 restraint 1 no H2 restraint The tripping curve setting is 0 definite time 1 IDMT 6 The negative sequence factor is 0 None 0 1 Low 2 25 2 Average 4 5 3 High 9 7 Acknowledgment of the ambient temperature is encoded as follows 0 No 1 Yes Not used The inhibition input setting is encoded as follows 0 No inhibition 1 Inhibit recloser by logic input 126 Not used D The activation mode of each of the cycles is encoded as follows Correspondence between bit position and protection according to the table below Bit Activation by Inst O C 1 Time delayed O C 1 Inst O C 2 Time delayed O C 2 Inst E F 1 Time delayed E F 1 Inst E F 2 Time delayed E F 2 The bit status is encoded as follows 0 No activation by the protection 1 Activation by the protection NI o1 BR O N O PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 5 25 Modbus communication 5 26 Access to remote settings General characteristics settings read only Function number 3002 Setting Data 1 Rated frequency 2 Remote setting enabled 3 Sepam working language 4 Number of period before disturbance recording 5 Active setting groupe 6 Setting mode 7 Type of phase current sensor 8 Number of CTs 9 Rated current 10 Base current 1
23. m 2 wire RS 485 signals L L m distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V Power supply m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block m reversible phase and neutral m earthed via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 6 35 PE50036 Installation ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converter 6 36 ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters Function The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master central computer equipped with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS 485 network Without requiring any flow control signals the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces There are 2 types of ACE919 converters m ACE919CC DC powered m ACE919CA AC powered Characteristics Weight 0 280 kg Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Power supply 110 to 220 V AC 24 to 48 V DC 20 10 47 to 63 Hz Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating Galvanic isolation 2000 Vrms 50 Hz between power supply and frame and 1 min between power supply and interface supply Data format 11 bits 1 start 8 bits 1 parity 1 stop Transmission delay lt 100 ns Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces 12 V D
24. page 6 22 fq Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 MT10252 Network diagnosis Tripping current functions Negative sequence unbalance TRIP 1 Tripping current Operation This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip m TRIP1 phase 1 current m TRIP2 phase 2 current m TRIP phase 3 current m TRIPIO residual current It is based on measurement of the fundamental component This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1 The tripping currents are saved in the event of a power failure tripping order Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range phase current 0 1 to 40 In Residual current 0 1 to 20 Ino Unit A or kA Accuracy 5 1 digit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit 1 In InO rated current set in the general settings Negative sequence unbalance Operation This function gives the negative sequence component T li Ib The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents m 3 phases gt 4 gt 22 gt li 3X lita 12 al3 2T 3 with a e m 2 phases 5 Ti a213 27 witha e These 2 form
25. range 2 2 5 VA 0 06757 ACE990 range 2 2 5 VA 0 08850 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 09091 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 11364 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 15873 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA 0 16667 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA 0 20000 ACE990 range 2 5 5 VA 0 26316 ACE990 range 2 7 5 VA Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current I0 input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m to residual current l0 input on connector E terminals 15 and 14 shielding m to residual current l O input on connector E terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cables m cable between core balance CT and ACE990 less than 50 m long m sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam maximum length 2 m m cable cross section between 0 93 mm AWG 18 and 2 5 mm AWG 13 m resistance per unit length less than 100 mQ m m minimum dielectric strength 100 Vrms Connect the ACE990 connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible 2 cm maximum to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means 6 17 Installation Voltage transformers The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector item on B2X type Sepam units CCT640 The connector c
26. ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm m the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable O the network cable must be stripped O the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp m the interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green fittings m the interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC J Merlin Gerin 6 27 PE50023 DE51663 DE52077 Installation 1 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected 4 wire ACE959 RS 485 network A B A B Power supply 12 or 24V DC A lt lt x O O Rx TXx Tx CD 4 s E ers ener K Power supply 12 or 24V DC Power supply 4 wire 12 or RS 485 24V DC network 1 Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in the shielded cable 3 pairs 2 Terminal block for connection of the distributed power supply module 6 28 S Merlin Gerin ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface Function The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions m electrical interface between Sepam and a 4 wire RS 485 communication network m main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight 0 2 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail 25 C to 70 C Same c
27. the circuit breaker has actually changed status If the circuit breaker status does not match the last order sent a Control fault message and remote indication TS45 are generated PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 4 7 MT10196 MT10197 Control and monitoring functions Description This function provides m full tripping discrimination m a substantial reduction in delayed tripping of the circuit breakers located nearest the source drawback of the classical time based discrimination process The system applies to the definite time DT and IDMT phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions td X 0 9s J td X 0 6s J J i td X 0 3s 3 i td Xs e g Radial distribution with use of time based discrimination td tripping time definite time curves T i e g radial distribution with use of the Sepam logic discrimination system 4 8 MT10195 ef Merlin Gerin Logic discrimination ANSI code 68 With this type of system time delays are set in accordance with the device to be protected without any concern for the discrimination aspect Operating principle sending of BI level n 1 Sepam O3 output other level n Sepam level n yy a a ry receipt of BI When a fault occurs in a radial network the fault current flows through the circuit between the source and the location of the fault m the protection units upstream from the faul
28. 0 0030 0 0027 0 0025 110 0 0422 0 0391 0 0363 0 0339 0 0264 0 0212 0 0175 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0095 0 0084 0 0075 0 0067 0 0060 0 0055 0 0050 115 0 0639 0 0592 0 0550 0 0513 0 0398 0 0320 0 0264 0 0222 0 0189 0 0164 0 0143 0 0126 0 0112 0 0101 0 0091 0 0082 0 0075 120 0 0862 0 0797 0 0740 0 0690 0 0535 0 0429 0 0353 0 0297 0 0253 0 0219 0 0191 0 0169 0 0150 0 0134 0 0121 0 0110 0 0100 125 0 1089 0 1007 0 0934 0 0870 0 0673 0 0540 0 0444 0 0372 0 0317 0 0274 0 0240 0 0211 0 0188 0 0168 0 0151 0 0137 0 0125 130 0 13822 0 1221 0 1132 0 1054 0 0813 0 0651 0 0535 0 0449 0 0382 0 0330 0 0288 0 0254 0 0226 0 0202 0 0182 0 0165 0 0150 135 0 1560 0 1440 0 1334 0 1241 0 0956 0 0764 0 0627 0 0525 0 0447 0 0386 0 0337 0 0297 0 0264 0 0236 0 0213 0 0192 0 0175 140 0 1805 0 1664 0 1540 0 1431 0 1100 0 0878 0 0720 0 0603 0 0513 0 0443 0 0386 0 0340 0 0302 0 0270 0 0243 0 0220 0 0200 145 0 2055 0 1892 0 1750 0 1625 0 1246 0 0993 0 0813 0 0681 0 0579 0 0499 0 0435 0 0384 0 0341 0 0305 0 0274 0 0248 0 0226 150 0 2312 0 2127 0 1965 0 1823 0 1395 0 1110 0 0908 0 0759 0 0645 0 0556 0 0485 0 0427 0 0379 0 0339 0 0305 0 0276 0 0251 155 0 2575 0 2366 0 2185 0 2025 0 1546 0 1228 0 1004 0 0838 0 0712 0 0614 0 0535 0 0471 0 0418 0 0374 0 0336 0 0304 0 0277 160 0 2846 0 2612 0 2409 0 2231 0 1699 0 1347 0 1100 0 0918 0 0780 0 0671 0 0585 0 0515 0 0457 0 0408 0 0367 0 0332 0 0302 165 0 3124 0 2864 0 2639 0 2442 0 1855 0 1468 0 1197 0 0999 0 0847 0 0729 0 0635 0 0559 0 0496 0 0443 0 0398 0 0
29. 0096 0 0101 0 0107 0 0113 10 00 0 0005 0 0010 0 0015 0 0020 0 0025 0 0030 0 0035 0 0040 0 0046 0 0051 0 0056 0 0061 0 0066 0 0071 0 0076 0 0081 0 0086 0 0091 0 0096 0 0102 12 50 0 0003 0 0006 0 0010 0 0013 0 0016 0 0019 0 0023 0 0026 0 0029 0 0032 0 0035 0 0039 0 0042 0 0045 0 0048 0 0052 0 0055 0 0058 0 0061 0 0065 15 00 0 0002 0 0004 0 0007 0 0009 0 0011 0 0013 0 0016 0 0018 0 0020 0 0022 0 0025 0 0027 0 0029 0 0031 0 0034 0 0036 0 0038 0 0040 0 0043 0 0045 17 50 0 0002 0 0003 0 0005 0 0007 0 0008 0 0010 0 0011 0 0013 0 0015 0 0016 0 0018 0 0020 0 0021 0 0023 0 0025 0 0026 0 0028 0 0030 0 0031 0 0033 20 00 0 0001 0 0003 0 0004 0 0005 0 0006 0 0008 0 0009 0 0010 0 0011 0 0013 0 0014 0 0015 0 0016 0 0018 0 0019 0 0020 0 0021 0 0023 0 0024 0 0025 3 21 Protection functions Description The phase overcurrent function comprises 4 independant elements divided into two groups of 2 elements called Group A and Group B respectively The use of the two groups may be chosen by parameter setting m operation with Group A or Group B exclusively with switching from one group to the other dependent on the state of logic input 113 exclusively or by remote control TC3 TC4 113 0 group A 1138 1 group B m operation with Group A and Group B active for 4 set point operation m enabling disabling of each group of 2 elements A
30. 0534 0 0555 0 0576 0 0598 0 0619 0 0640 0 0661 0 0683 0 0704 0 0726 0 0747 0 0769 0 0790 0 0812 0 0834 5 50 0 0167 0 0183 0 0200 0 0217 0 0234 0 0251 0 0268 0 0285 0 0302 0 0319 0 0336 0 0353 0 0370 0 0388 0 0405 0 0422 0 0439 0 0457 0 0474 0 0491 0 0509 0 0526 0 0543 0 0561 0 0578 0 0596 0 0613 0 0631 0 0649 0 0666 0 0684 PCRED301005EN June 2005 6 00 0 0140 0 0154 0 0168 0 0182 0 0196 0 0211 0 0225 0 0239 0 0253 0 0267 0 0282 0 0296 0 0310 0 0325 0 0339 0 0353 0 0368 0 0382 0 0397 0 0411 0 0426 0 0440 0 0455 0 0469 0 0484 0 0498 0 0513 0 0528 0 0542 0 0557 0 0572 6 50 0 0119 0 0131 0 0143 0 0155 0 0167 0 0179 0 0191 0 0203 0 0215 0 0227 0 0240 0 0252 0 0264 0 0276 0 0288 0 0300 0 0313 0 0325 0 0337 0 0349 0 0361 0 0374 0 0386 0 0398 0 0411 0 0423 0 0435 0 0448 0 0460 0 0473 0 0485 7 00 0 0103 0 0113 0 0123 0 0134 0 0144 0 0154 0 0165 0 0175 0 0185 0 0196 0 0206 0 0217 0 0227 0 0237 0 0248 0 0258 0 0269 0 0279 0 0290 0 0300 0 0311 0 0321 0 0332 0 0343 0 0353 0 0364 0 0374 0 0385 0 0395 0 0406 0 0417 Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS Setting examples 7 50 0 0089 0 0098 0 0107 0 0116 0 0125 0 0134 0 0143 0 0152 0 0161 0 0170 0 0179 0 0188 0 0197 0 0207 0 0216 0 0225 0 0234 0 0243 0 0252 0 0261 0 0270 0 0279 0 0289 0 0298 0 0307 0 0316 0 0325 0 0334 0 0344 0 0353 0 0362 8 0
31. 1 Protection functions Setting ranges ANSI 27 Phase to phase undervoltage 5 to 100 of Unp ANSI 27D 47 Positive sequence undervoltage 15 to 60 of Unp ANSI 27R Remanent undervoltage 5 to 100 of Unp ANSI 278S Phase to neutral undervoltage 5 to 100 of Vnp ANSI 37 Phase undercurrent 0 15 to 1 Ib ANSI 38 49T Temperature monitoring 8 or 16 RTDs Alarm and trip set points 0 to 180 C or 32 to 356 F ANSI 46 Negative sequence unbalance Definite time 0 1 to 5 Ib IDMT 0 1 to 0 5 Ib ANSI 48 51LR 14 Excessive starting time locked rotor 0 5 Ib to 5 Ib ANSI 49RMS Thermal overload Accounting for negative sequence component Time constant Heating ST starting time LT and LTS time delays Rate 1 0 2 25 4 5 9 T1 5 to 120 mn 0 05 sto 300s 0 05 sto 300s 0 05 s to 300s 0 05 s to 300s 0 05 s to 300s 0 1 s to 300s 0 1sto1s 0 5sto 300s 0 05s to 300s Rate 2 T1 5 to 120 mn Cooling Alarm and tripping set points Cold curve modification factor Switching of thermal settings conditions Maximum equipment temperature ANSI 50 51 Phase overcurrent T2 5 to 600 mn 50 to 300 of rated thermal capacity O to 100 By logic input 126 transformer T2 5 to 600 mn By Is set point adjustable from 0 25 to 8 Ib motor 60 to 200 C Timer hold Tripping time delay Tripping curve Definite time DT DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B
32. 1 577 1 53 1 485 1 444 1 404 1 367 1 332 li Ib contd 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 2 500 K cont d 1 298 1 267 1 236 1 18 1 167 1 154 1 13 1 105 1 082 1 06 1 04 1 02 1 PCRED301005EN June 2005 CEN 3 11 Protection functions DE50558 0 11b excessive starting time locked rotor rotor rotation Case of normal starting DE50559 0 11b excessive starting time locked rotor rotor rotation Case of excessive starting time starting time finished DE50560 0 1Ib excessive starting time locked rotor output rotor rotation Excessive starting time locked rotor ANSI code 48 51LR 14 Operation This function is three phase It comprises two parts m excessive Starting time during starting the protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the ST time delay normal starting time m locked rotor O at the normal operating rate after starting the protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the LT time delay of the definite time type O locked on start large motors may have very long starting time due to their inertia or the reduce voltage supply This starting time is longer than the permissive rotor blocking time To protect such a motor LTS timer initiate a trip if a start has been detected I gt Is or if the motor speed is zero For a
33. 278 2 E E E 27S 3 278 3 Em E E 59 1 59 1 E E 59 2 59 2 E E E 59N 1 59N 1 E a 5ON 2 59N 2 E E 81H 81H m M 81L 1 81L 4 Bm 81L 2 81L 2 E E E AR bBo M m disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick up m watchdog on output 04 Indicator marking L1 U lt 27 L2 U lt 27D L3 U lt 27R L4 U gt 59 L5 U gt 59N L6 F gt 81H L7 F lt 81L L8 F lt lt 81L L9 Trip PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning principles and method Protection relay testing Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning with the dual aim of maximizing availability and minimizing the risk of malfunctioning of the assembly being commissioned The problem consists of defining the consistency of the appropriate tests keeping in mind that the relay is always involved as the main link in the protection chain Therefore protection relays based on electromechanical and static technologies must be systematically submitted to detailed testing not only to qualify relay commissioning but also to check that they actually are in good operating order and maintain the required level of performance The Sepam concept makes it possible to do away with such testing since m the use of digital technology guarantees the reproducibility of the performances announced m each of the Sepam functions has undergone full factory qualification m an internal self testing system provides continuous informa
34. 485 communication network m main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight 0 1 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Standard EIA 2 wire RS 485 differential Distributed power supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 Consumption 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Number of Sepam Maximum length with Maximum length with units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply 5 320 m 1000 m 10 750m 20 160 m 450 m 25 125 m 375 m Description and dimensions A and B Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord Grounding earthing terminal 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active Sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for RS 485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 Q to be set to m X lt if the module is not at one end of the RS 485 network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the RS 485 network 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 6 mm Connection m connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m connection of earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section gt 6 mm or cable with cross section 2 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm
35. 5534 0 4327 0 3498 0 2897 0 2444 0 2094 0 1815 0 1591 0 1406 0 1253 0 1123 0 1013 0 0919 0 0838 175 0 7161 0 6631 0 6166 0 5754 0 4487 0 3621 0 2996 0 2526 0 2162 0 1874 0 1641 0 1451 0 1292 0 1158 0 1045 0 0947 0 0863 180 0 7464 0 6904 0 6413 0 5978 0 4651 0 3747 0 3096 0 2608 0 2231 0 1933 0 1693 0 1495 0 1331 0 1193 0 1076 0 0976 0 0889 185 0 7777 0 7184 0 6665 0 6208 0 4816 0 3874 0 3197 0 2691 0 2301 0 1993 0 1744 0 1540 0 1371 0 1229 0 1108 0 1004 0 0915 190 0 8100 0 7472 0 6925 0 6444 0 4985 0 4003 0 3300 0 2775 0 2371 0 2052 0 1796 0 1585 0 1411 0 1264 0 1140 0 1033 0 0941 195 0 8434 0 7769 0 7191 0 6685 0 5157 0 4133 0 3403 0 2860 0 2442 0 2113 0 1847 0 1631 0 1451 0 1300 0 1171 0 1062 0 0967 200 0 8780 0 8075 0 7465 0 6931 0 5331 0 4265 0 3508 0 2945 0 2513 0 2173 0 1900 0 1676 0 1491 0 1335 0 1203 0 1090 0 0993 3 18 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Cold curves for Es0 0 I Ib Es 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 4 80 0 0219 0 0242 0 0264 0 0286 0 0309 0 0331 0 0353 0 0376 0 0398 0 0421 0 0444 0 0466 0 0489 0 0512 0 0535 0 0558 0 0581 0 0604 0 0627 0 0650 0 0673 0 0696 0 0720 0 0743 0 0766 0 0790 0 0813 0 0837 0 0861 0 0884 0 0908 5 00 0 0202 0 0222 0 0243 0 0263 0 0284 0 0305 0 0325 0 0346 0 0367 0 0387 0 0408 0 0429 0 0450 0 0471 0 0492 0 0513 0
36. 60 Es 50 0 1579 0 1491 0 1410 0 1335 0 1090 0 0908 0 0768 0 0659 0 0572 0 0501 0 0442 0 0393 0 0352 0 0317 0 0288 0 0262 0 0239 55 0 1752 0 1653 0 1562 0 1479 0 1206 0 1004 0 0849 0 0727 0 0631 0 0552 0 0487 0 0434 0 0388 0 0350 0 0317 0 0288 0 0263 60 0 1927 0 1818 0 1717 0 1625 0 1324 0 1100 0 0929 0 0796 0 069 0 0604 0 0533 0 0474 0 0424 0 0382 0 0346 0 0315 0 0288 65 0 2106 0 1985 0 1875 0 1773 0 1442 0 1197 0 1011 0 0865 0 075 0 0656 0 0579 0 0515 0 0461 0 0415 0 0375 0 0342 0 0312 70 0 2288 0 2156 0 2035 0 1924 0 1562 0 1296 0 1093 0 0935 0 081 0 0708 0 0625 0 0555 0 0497 0 0447 0 0405 0 0368 0 0336 75 0 2474 0 2329 0 2197 0 2076 0 1684 0 1395 0 1176 0 1006 0 087 0 0761 0 0671 0 0596 0 0533 0 0480 0 0434 0 0395 0 0361 80 0 2662 0 2505 0 2362 0 2231 0 1807 0 1495 0 1260 0 1076 0 0931 0 0813 0 0717 0 0637 0 0570 0 0513 0 0464 0 0422 0 0385 85 0 2855 0 2685 0 2530 0 2389 0 1931 0 1597 0 1344 0 1148 0 0992 0 0867 0 0764 0 0678 0 0607 0 0546 0 0494 0 0449 0 0410 90 0 3051 0 2868 0 2701 0 2549 0 2057 0 1699 0 1429 0 1219 0 1054 0 092 0 0811 0 0720 0 0644 0 0579 0 0524 0 0476 0 0435 95 0 3251 0 3054 0 2875 0 2712 0 2185 0 1802 0 1514 0 1292 0 1116 0 0974 0 0858 0 0761 0 0681 0 0612 0 0554 0 0503 0 0459 100 0 3456 0 3244 0 3051 0 2877 0 2314 0 1907 0 1601 0 1365 0 1178 0 1028 0 0905 0 0803 0 0718 0 0645 0 0584 0 0530 0 0484 105 0 3664 0 3437 0 3231 0 3045 0 2445 0 2012 0 1688 0 1438 0 1241 0 1082 0 0952 0 0845 0 0755 0 0679 0 0614 0 0558 0 0509 110 0 3877
37. 6094 1 7838 1 9951 2 2634 2 6311 3 2189 Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS Setting examples 1 30 1 35 0 3508 0 3207 0 3937 0 3592 0 4386 0 3993 0 4855 0 4411 0 5348 0 4847 0 5866 0 5302 0 6413 0 5780 0 6991 0 6281 0 7605 0 6809 0 8258 0 7366 0 8958 0 7956 0 9710 0 8583 1 0524 0 9252 1 1409 0 9970 1 2381 1 0742 1 8457 1 1580 1 4663 1 2493 1 60385 1 3499 1 7626 1 4618 1 9518 1 5877 2 1855 1 7319 2 4908 1 9003 2 9327 2 1030 2 3576 2 6999 3 2244 1 40 0 2945 0 3294 0 3655 0 4029 0 4418 0 4823 0 5245 0 5686 0 6147 0 6630 0 7138 0 7673 0 8238 0 8837 0 9474 1 0154 1 0885 1 1672 1 2528 1 3463 1 4495 1 5645 1 6946 1 8441 2 0200 2 2336 2 5055 2 8802 3 4864 1 45 0 2716 0 3033 0 3360 0 3698 0 4049 0 4412 0 4788 0 5180 0 5587 0 6012 0 6455 0 6920 0 7406 0 7918 0 8457 0 9027 0 9632 1 0275 1 0962 1 1701 1 2498 1 3364 1 4313 1 5361 1 6532 1 7858 1 9388 2 1195 2 3401 2 6237 3 0210 1 50 0 2513 0 2803 0 3102 0 3409 0 3727 0 4055 0 4394 0 4745 0 5108 0 5486 0 5878 0 6286 0 6712 0 7156 0 7621 0 8109 0 8622 0 9163 0 9734 1 0341 1 0986 1 1676 1 2417 1 3218 1 4088 1 5041 1 6094 1 7272 1 8608 2 0149 2 1972 1 55 0 2333 0 2600 0 2873 0 3155 0 3444 0 3742 0 4049 0 4366 0 4694 0 5032 0 5383 0 5746 0 6122 0 6514 0 6921 0 7346 0 7789 0 8253 0 8740 0 9252 0 9791 1 0361 1 0965 1 1609 1 2296 1 3035 1 3832 1 4698 1 5647 1 6695
38. 682 0 920 0 880 0 979 0 882 0 858 0 655 0 912 0 868 0 977 0 871 0 849 0 631 0 905 0 857 0 976 0 861 0 840 0 609 0 898 0 846 0 974 0 852 0 831 0 589 0 891 0 837 0 973 0 843 0 824 0 571 0 885 0 828 0 971 0 834 0 817 0 555 0 879 0 819 0 970 0 826 0 811 0 540 0 874 0 811 0 969 0 819 0 806 0 527 0 869 0 804 0 968 0 812 0 801 0 514 0 864 0 797 0 967 0 805 0 796 0 503 0 860 0 790 0 966 0 798 0 792 0 492 0 855 0 784 0 965 0 792 0 788 0 482 0 851 0 778 0 964 0 786 0 784 0 473 0 848 0 772 IAC El 200 226 122 172 82 899 36 687 16 178 9 566 6 541 4 872 3 839 3 146 2 653 2 288 2 007 1 786 1 607 1 460 1 337 1 233 1 144 1 067 1 000 0 941 0 888 0 841 0 799 0 761 0 727 0 695 0 667 0 641 0 616 0 594 0 573 0 554 0 536 0 519 0 504 0 489 0 475 0 463 0 450 3 35 MT10539 General IDMT protection functions Protection functions Standard inverse time SIT curve Extremely inverse time EIT curve Ultra inverse time UIT curve t s Very inverse time VIT or LTI curve MT10528
39. ASCII string of n object Exception frame If an error occurs during request processing a special exception frame is sent Field Size bytes Slave number 1 171 ABh 1 Generic access exception 2Bh 80h 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 01 or 03 1 Type of error CRC16 2 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 5 33 5 34 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation PCRED301005EN June 2005 Contents Precautions Equipment identification Base unit Dimensions Assembly Connection Connection of current input Other current input connection schemes Other residual current input connection schemes Connection of voltage inputs Other voltage input connection schemes Current transformers 1 A 5 A LPCT type current sensors CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs CSH30 interposing ring CT ACE990 Core balance CT interface Voltage transformers MES114 modules Optional remote modules Connection MET148 2 Temperature sensor module MSA141 Analog output module DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Communication accessories selection guide Communication interface connection ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 Fiber optic interface ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Description Connection ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters 6 2 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14
40. B Operation The phase overcurrent protection function is three pole It picks up if one two or three of the phase currents reach the operation set point It is time delayed The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves opposite Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay MT10533 Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards y type 1 MT10903 1 1 2 IDMT protection principle 3 22 Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50 51 The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is The tripping time for I Is values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A 1 IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B 1 IEC extremely inverse time EIT C 1 IEEE moderately inverse IEC D 1 IEEE very inverse IEC E 1 IEEE extremely inverse IEC F 1 IAC inverse 1 IAC very inverse 1 IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions The function takes into account current variations during the time delay inter
41. Connection to 1 CT with CSH30 interposing ring CT 0 1 to 1 5 Ind Connection to core balance CT with ACE990 0 1 to 1 5 Ind Connection to CSH residual 2 A rating 0 2to3A current sensor 20 A rating 2 to 30 A Unit A or KA Accuracy 2 typically 1 at InO 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 InO 5 if lt 0 3 InO Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit 1 InO rated current set in the general settings 2 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 excluding sensor accuracy s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Metering functions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Average current and peak demand currents Operation This function gives m the average RMS current for each phase that has been obtained for each integration interval m the greatest average RMS current value for each phase that has been obtained since the last reset The values are refreshed after each integration interval an interval that may be set from 5 to 60 mn Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero m press the key on the display when a peak demand current is displayed m via the clear command in the SFT2841 software m via the communication link remote control order TC6 Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 In Unit Aor kA Accuracy typically 1 2 2 f
42. Fiber type Wavelength Type of connector With distributed power supply 12 VDC 24 V DC 320 m 1000 m 180 m 750 m 130 m 450 m 125 m 375m Multimode glass 820 nm infra red ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Maximum length of fiber optic network Fiber diameter Numerical Attenuation Minimum optical Maximum fiber um aperture dBm km power available length NA dBm m 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 700 62 5126 1800 100 140 0 3 4 2800 200 HCS 2600 Maximum length calculated with m minimum optical power available m maximum fiber attenuation m losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 8 km Dimensions ACE969TP service 52 6 31 Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Description ACE969 communication interfaces ACE969TP ACE969FO 1 Grounding earthing terminal using supplied braid 2 Power supply terminal block 3 RJ45 connector to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 4 Green LED ACE969 energized 5 Red LED ACE969 interface status m LED off ACE969 set up and communication operational m LED flashing ACE969 not set up or setup incorrect m LED remains on ACE969 has faulted 6 Service connector reserved for software upgrades 7 E LAN 2 wire R8485 communication port ACE969TP and ACE969FO 8 S LAN 2 wire RS485 communication port
43. In0 sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH core balance CT In0 In of the CT if the measurement is taken bya 1A or 5 A current transformer 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEEE very inverse IEEE extremely inverse IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 0 04 to 4 20 0 07 to 8 33 0 01 to 0 93 0 13 to 15 47 0 42 to 51 86 0 73 to 90 57 1 24 to 154 32 0 34 to 42 08 0 61 to 75 75 1 08 to 134 4 5 For IsO lt 0 4 In0 the minimum time delay is 300 ms If a shorter time delay is needed use the CT CSH30 combination PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE50248 Earth fault ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves I0 gt IsO time delayed output 10 gt IsO pick up signal value of internal time delay counter Characteristics Tripping curvet Setting IsO set point Definite time setting IDMT time setting Resolution Accuracy 2 Sum of CTs 5 With CSH sensor 2 A rating 20 A rating CT CSH30 Core balance CT with ACE990 Sum of CTs 0 5 With CSH sensor 2 A rating 20 A rating CT CSH30 Core balance CT with ACE9
44. PCRED301005EN June 2005 LPCT type current sensors DE52240 a RUUUDUUL Ba T arn LPCT settings L2 o lt gt 5 L1 ET 25 amp 125A 10000000 50 amp 250A 01000000 100 amp 500A 00100000 133 amp 666A 00010000 200 amp 1000A 00001000 320 amp 1600A 00000 00 400 amp 2000A 000000140 630 amp 3159A 0000000 4 Z ttat2 L3 OOS SRO SRXOSS 6 59631 LPCT current input connector connecteur entr e courant LPCT CCA670 Connection of the cords of the 3 sensors to the RJ45 plugs on the side of the CCA670 S S 0 origin France Check plug 1 9 8 T 6 5 4 SESKIS SKIIF ISSN 2 pma S e SSOVSNES OO OO Test plug Correspondence between microswitch settings and the selected rated current In 2 ratings possible values per setting MT11022 MT11056 MT11028 67 5 69 46 Front view with cover lifted Right side view Cut out f Merlin Gerin 6 13 PE50032 E40465 DE51679 Assembly on MV cables Installation f x UF Je l _ Da ai CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs The CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs must be installed on insulated cables Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have an earthed shielding 6 14 Assembly on mounting plate DE10228 DE51678 CSH120 and CSH200 Core ba
45. PE50336 7 2 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use SFT2841 setting and operating software Welcome window Description The SFT2841 welcome window opens when the program is launched SFT 2841 PE50426 o amp It lets you choose the language for the SFT2841 screens and provides access to the J Engen Sepam parameter and protection setting files m in disconnected mode you can open or create a parameter and protection setting Welcome 00 SFT EHT sour Sapam file for a Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 Din abo e m when connected to a single Sepam unit you can access the parameter and protection setting file for the Sepam unit connected to the PC m when connected to a Sepam network you can access the parameter and Dea yiu raii ti protection setting files for a group of Sepam units connected to the PC via a communication network Corton r Language of SFT2841 screens a SFT2841 software can be used in English French or Spanish The language is ee RA RE selected at the top of the window Using SFT2841 in disconnected mode amme A Sarea 40 Smer B Disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameter and protection setting files for 5 Sy 3 a 3 a Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 prior to commissioning L ri B 5 The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be l l downloaded later to the Sepam units in connected mode m To create a new parameter a
46. Principle stored record MT10181 triggering event 1 Characteristics Record duration Record content Analog signals recorded Logical signals Number of stored records File format x periods before the triggering event total 86 periods Set up file date channel characteristics measuring transformer ratio Sample file 12 values per period recorded signal 4 current channels 11 12 13 10 or 4 voltage channels V1 V2 V3 10 digital inputs outputs O1 pick up 2 COMTRADE 97 1 According to parameter setting with the SFT2841 default setting 36 cycles 2 According to sensor type and connection ef Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Machine operation assistance functions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Running hours counter and operating time Thermal capacity used Running hours counter operating time The counter gives the running total of time during which the protected device motor or transformer has been operating I gt 0 1lb The initial counter value may be modified using the SFT2841 software The counter is saved every 4 hours Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Range 0 to 65535 Unit hours Thermal capacity used Operation The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal protection func
47. The Sepam communication interfaces are configured using SFT2841 software The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication configuration window in SFT2841 To access this window m open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841 m check the box for ACE9xx communication interface m click Lal the Communication configuration window appears m select the type of interface used ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m select the Modbus communication protocol The configuration parameters will vary depending on the communication interface selected ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO The table below specifies the parameters to be configured depending on the communication interface chosen Parameters to be configured ACE949 ACE969TP ACE969FO ACE959 ACE937 Physical layer parameters E E E Fiber optic parameters E Modbus advanced parameters E E E LAN parameters E E Configuring the physical layer of the Modbus port Asynchronous serial transmission is used with the following character format m 8 data bits m 1 stop bit m parity according to parameter setting The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the Modbus port are m slave number Sepam address m transmission speed m parity check type Authorized values Default value 1 to 247 1 Parameters Sepam address Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 19200 bauds 38400 bauds Parity None Even or Odd Even Configuring the ACE969FO fiber optic port
48. cables is ensured by the electrical continuity of the clamps m all cable clamps are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals of the ACE969 interface protective and functional earthing i e the shielding of the RS485 cables is earthed as well m on the ACE969TP interface the cable clamps for the S LAN and E LAN RS485 networks are earthed Fiber optic communication port S LAN The fiber optic connection can be made m point to point to an optic star system m in a ring system active echo The sending and receiving fiber optics fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors The fiber optics are screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors 6 33 PE50035 Installation ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter 6 34 ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter Function The ACE909 2 converter is used to connect a master central computer equipped with a V24 RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS 485 network Without requiring any flow control signals after the parameters are set the ACE909 2 converter performs conversion network polarization and automatic dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two way simplex half duplex single pair transmission The ACE909 2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949 2 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces The communication settings should be the sam
49. characteristics as Sepam base units Operating temperature Environmental characteristics None None 4mA 4mA Isolation from earth Current injected in RTD Description and dimensions A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4 B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8 Ba RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Grounding earthing terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m X if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module 2 Jumper used to select module number to be set to m MET1 1st MET148 2 module to measure temperatures T1 to T8 default position m MET2 2nd MET148 2 module to measure temperatures T9 to T16 for Sepam series 40 and series 80 only Connection Connection of the earthing terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section 2 6 mm or cable with cross section gt 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm Connection of RTDs to screw type connectors m 1 wire with cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 m or 2 wires with cross section 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 Recommended cross sections according to distance mupto100m 21mm AWG 16 mupto300m 21 5mm AWG 14 m upto 1 km 22 5 mm AWG 12
50. communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Rated frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Range 50 Hz 45 Hz to 55 Hz 60 Hz 55 Hz to 65 Hz Accuracy 0 05 Hz Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 01 Hz or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At Un in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Temperature Operation This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs m platinum Pt100 100 Q at 0 C in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m nickel 100 Q or 120 Q at 0 C Each RTD channel gives one measurement m tx RID x temperature The function also indicates RTD faults m RTD disconnected tx gt 205 C m RTD shorted tx lt 35 C In the event of a fault display of the value is inhibited The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Range 30 C to 200 C or 22 F to 392 F Accuracy 2 C 1 C from 20 to 140 C Resolution 1 C or 1 F Refresh interval 5 seconds typical 1 At Un in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Accuracy derating according to wiring see chapter installation of MET148 2 module
51. communication parameters are modified Using the counters Modbus diagnosis counters help to detect and resolve communication problems They can be accessed by the dedicated read functions Modbus protocol functions 8 and 11 CPT2 and CPT9 counters can be displayed on SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen An incorrect speed or parity increments CPT2 Non reception is signaled by the lack of change on CPT9 Operating anomalies It is advisable to connect the Sepam units to the Modbus network one by one Make sure that the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant Sepam by checking the activity on the RS 232 RS 485 converter or the fiber optic converter if there is one and on the ACE module RS 485 network m check the wiring on each ACE module m check the tightness of the screw terminals on each ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m check that polarization is only at one point and that impedance matching is at both ends of the RS 485 network m check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969TP m check that the ACE909 2 or ACE919 converter used is connected powered and set up correctly Fiber optic network m check the connections on the ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969FO m check that the converter or fiber optic star used is
52. either of the following ways m manually one by one O the Add button is used to define a new Sepam device it is allocated a default Modbus address O the Edit button is used to modify the Modbus address if necessary O the Delete button removes a device from the configuration m automatically by running an automatic search of the Sepam units connected O the Automatic search Stop search button starts or interrupts the search O when SFT2841 recognizes a Sepam unit its Modbus address and type are shown on screen o when a Modbus device other than Sepam responds to SFT2841 its Modbus address is displayed The text indicates that the device is not a Sepam The Sepam network configuration is saved in a file when the window closes by pressing the OK button Access to Sepam information To establish communication between SFT2841 and a Sepam network select the Sepam network configuration you want and press Connect The Sepam network is displayed in the connection window SFT2841 polls all the equipment defined in the selected configuration Each Sepam queried is represented by an icon wi Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 actually connected to the network E E Sepam series 80 actually connected to the network m B Sepam configured but not connected to the network a a Device other than Sepam connected to the network A summary report of each Sepam detected as present is also displayed m Sepam Modbus address m
53. function 66 starts per hour O latching for function 51LR mmeo om 0o 0o0 0 f Merlin Gerin 7 19 Use B21 and B22 applications Hardware configuration identification Sepam xxxx model UX MES module absent MET module absent MSA module absent DMS module present ACE module absent Output parameter setting m outputs used O1 to 04 m shunt coils O1 to O3 m undervoltage coils 04 E impulse mode no latched Program logic m circuit breaker control no m assignment of logic inputs not used General characteristics network frequency 50 Hz enable remote setting no working language English primary rated voltage Unp 20 kV secondary rated voltage Uns 100 V voltages measured by VTs V1 V2 V3 residual voltage sum of 3Vs 1 Type B21 performs the same functions as cancelled type B20 7 20 pre trig for disturbance recording 36 periods f Merlin Gerin Default parameter setting Protection functions m all the protection functions are off m the settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general characteristics by default m latching no m disturbance recording triggering with Control matrix m assignment of output relays and indicators according to chart Functions Outputs Indicators B21 B22 O1 02 O3 O4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 27D 1 27D 1 E 27D 2 27D 2 E E E 27R 27R E E 27 1 27 1 E E 27 2 27 2 E E E 27S 1 27S 1 E E H 27S 2
54. logic input 113 O 113 0 activation of group A O 113 1 activation of group B m or via the communication link o TC3 activation of group A o TC4 activation of group B The use of the switching of groups of settings functions does not exclude the use of the logic discrimination function 4 10 J Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Control and monitoring functions Events may be indicated on the front panel of Sepam by E appearance of a message on the display of the advanced UMI m lighting up of one of the 9 yellow signal lamps Functions Phase overcurrent Earth fault Thermal overload Negative sequence unbalance Locked rotor Locked rotor on start Excessive starting time Starts per hour Phase undercurrent Phase to phase overvoltage Phase to phase undervoltage Positive sequence undervoltage Phase to neutral undervoltage Neutral voltage displacement Overfrequency Underfrequency Rate of change of frequency Temperature monitoring 2 Thermostat 3 Buchholz 3 Pressure 3 Thermistor PTC NTC Trip circuit Supervision Circuit breaker contactor control Recloser Recloser Indications ANSI code 30 Message type indication Predefined messages All the messages connected to the standard Sepam functions are predefined and available in two language versions m in English factory messages not modifiable m in the local language according to the version delivered The language versi
55. loss of the thermal Capacity used value Block diagram input 126 leq gt ls selection of parameter group K ph calculation MEALS 7 of equivalent SUE E current T max ambient correction temperature by ambient temperature 3 14 ef Merlin Gerin Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS User information The following information is available for the user m time before restart enabled in case of inhibition of starting m time before tripping with constant current m heat rise See chapter Machine operation assistance functions Characteristics Set points group A group B Setting Es1 alarm set point 50 to 300 50 to 300 Es2 tripping set point 50 to 300 50 to 300 Es0 initial heat rise 0 to 100 0 to 100 Resolution 1 1 Time constants Setting T1 running heat rise 1 mn to 120 mn 1 mn to 120 mn T2 stopped cooling 5 mn to 600 mn 5 mn to 600 mn Resolution 1 mn 1 mn Accounting for negative sequence component Setting KO 2 25 4 5 9 Maximum equipment temperature according to insulation class Setting T max 60 to 200 Resolution 1 RMS current measurement Accuracy 5 Tripping time Accuracy 2 or1s Change of setting parameters By current threshold for motor Is set point 0 25 to 8 Ib By digital input for transformer Input 126 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 8 2 Equipment manufacturer data Es Es2 SL alarm a indication fa i input 26 tripping
56. m 50 125 700 62 5 125 1800 100 140 2800 200 HCS 2600 Maximum length calculated with m minimum optical power available m maximum fiber attenuation m losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 8 km Description and dimensions C RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active Sending or receiving in progress 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending Connection m the sending and receiving fiber optics fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors m fiber optics screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors m the interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green fittings f Merlin Gerin 6 29 Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Function The ACE969 multi protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20 40 and 80 They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent communication networks m the S LAN supervisory local area network port to connect Sepam to a supervision network using one of the three following protocols O IEC 60870 5 103 o DNP3 o RTU Modbus The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting
57. m reading of Sepam configuration and identification m time tagging of events synchronization via the network or externally via logic input 121 time tagging within a millisecond m remote reading of Sepam settings m remote setting of protection units m remote control of the analog output with MSA141 option m transfer of disturbance recording data 1 Modbus is a Modicon registered trademark s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE50378 Modbus communication Modbus protocol Characterization of exchanges Protocol principle The Modbus protocol may be used to read or write one or more bits one or more words the contents of the event counters or the contents of the diagnosis counters Modbus functions supported The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible sub group of the RTU Modbus protocol The functions listed below are handled by Sepam m basic functions data access master MT10203 request O function 1 reading of n output or internal bits O function 2 reading of n input bits O function 3 reading of n output or internal words O function 4 reading of n input words slave slave slave O function 5 writing of 1 bit o function 6 writing of 1 word Exchanges are initiated by the master and include a request by the master and a O function 7 high speed reading of 8 bits reply by the slave Sepam Requests by the master are either addressed to a given o fu
58. normal start the input 123 zero speed switch disable this protection Motor re acceleration When the motor re accelerates it consumes a current in the vicinity of the starting current gt Is without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of Ib The ST time delay which corresponds to the normal starting time may be reinitialized by a logic data input for particular uses input 122 E reinitialize the excessive starting time protection m set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value Starting is detected when the current consumed is 10 greater than the Ib current Block diagram MT10870 locked rotor output I gt 0 1Ib starting time output locked rotor at output Case of locked rotor output DE50561 0 11b excessive starting time locked rotor output rotor rotation Characteristics Is set point Setting 50 Ib lt Is lt 500 Ib Resolution 1 Accuracy 1 5 Pick up drop out ratio 93 5 5 ST LT and LTS time delays Setting ST 500 ms lt T lt 300 s LT 50 ms lt T lt 300s LTS 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 or from 25 ms to 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Case of starting locked rotor 3 12 ef Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 MT10858 MT10419 Protection functions Description This function is used t
59. operating location m reduced depth lt 30 mm m a single module for each Sepam to be connected by one of the CCA772 or CCA774 cords 2 or 4 meters The module may not be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs Characteristics Weight 0 3 kg Assembly Flush mounted Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Description and dimensions The module is flush mounted and secured simply by its clips No screw type fastener is required Side view Cut out for flush mounting mounting plate thickness lt 3 mm DE50055 15 RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord 1 Mounting clip 2 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tighteness gasket delivered with the DSM303 module to be installed if necessary Connection Ba RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor Rc s Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation Type of network Protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 Physical interface RS 485 2 wire 4 wire Fiber optic ST Star Ring See details on page Communication accessories selection guide There are 2 types of Sepam communication accessories m communication interfaces which are essential for connecting Se
60. power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 Indication LEDs m ON OFF on if ACE909 2 is energized m Tx on if RS 232 sending by ACE909 2 is active m Rx on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909 2 is active 4 SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Function SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q 2 wire RS 485 network impedance matching by 150 Q resistor DE50038 5 SW2 parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2 wire RS 485 network Rate bauds SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 1200 1 1 1 2400 o p h 4800 1 jo r Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE909 2 19200 io o i Jo 38400 1 Format SW2 4 SW2 5 With parity check 0 Without parity check eh aes g 1 stop bit compulsory for Sepam a ee ee ee 0 i 2 stop bits a o T Converter configuration when delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 11 bit format with parity check m 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated ACE909 2 Connection RS 232 link m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block A m maximum length 10 m m Rx Tx RS 232 receiving sending by ACE909 2 m OV Rx Tx common do not earth 2 wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply m to female 9 pin sub D connector
61. start 15 Protection 48 51LR 14 excessive starting time 16 Protection 66 CO NI BR OJ N co 20 Address word 0102 TS17 to TS32 bit address 1020 to 102F TS Use 17 Protection 27D 47 relay 1 18 Protection 27D 47 relay 2 19 Protection 27 relay 1 20 Protection 27 relay 2 21 Protection 27R 22 Protection 59 relay 1 23 Protection 59 relay 2 24 Protection 59N relay 1 25 Protection 59N relay 2 26 Protection 81H 27 Protection 81L relay 1 28 Protection 81L relay 2 29 Protection 27S phase 1 30 Protection 27S phase 2 31 Protection 27S phase 3 32 Protection 81R ef Merlin Gerin S20 T20 M20 B21 B22 E E E E E E E E E E m E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E T20 M20 B21 B22 E E E E E E E E m E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301005EN June 2005 Data addresses and encoding Address word 0103 TS33 to TS48 bit address 1030 to 103F TS Use 33 Reserved 34 Recloser in service 35 Recloser in progress 36 Recloser permanent trip 37 Recloser successful trip 38 Send blocking input 39 Remote setting inhibited 40 Remote control inhibited 41 Sepam not reset after fault 42 Remote control position discrepancy 43 Matching fault or Trip Circuit Supervision 44 Disturbance recording memorized 45 Control fault 46 Disturbance recording inhibited 47 Thermal protection inhibited 48 RTD fault 20 T20 M2
62. the calculation of residual current The In parameter primary rated current measured by an LPCT is to be chosen from the following values in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 Parameter to be set using the advanced UMI and the SFT2841 software tool to be completed by hardware setting of the microswitches on the CCA670 connector s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE51827 DE52067 DE52068 DE51830 Installation Base unit Other residual current input connection schemes Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents 11 12 and I3 measured by 3x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors See current input connection diagrams Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral systems in which very low fault currents need to be detected Setting range from 0 1 InO to 15 InO with InO 2 A or 20 A according to parameter setting The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current m CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT make 2 turns through CSH primary m CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 5 A CT make 4 turns through CSH primary Setting range from 0 1 In to 15 In with In CT primary current 1 ATC 2 turns 5 ATC 4 turns LA LD 4 i a o a a 1 ATC 2 turns 5 ATC 4 turns The ACE990 is used as an interface betwee
63. very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time energized measurement of residual current by thesum Characteristic The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions of the 3 phase CTs m if l0 gt 20 IsO tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 IsO The restraint disables tripping regardless of the m if 10 gt 15 In0 tripping time is the time that corresponds to 15 InO fundamental current The restraint may be inhibited by parameter setting Block diagram Definite time protection 1 IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T w 12 5 pick up signal and is the protection operation time delay i I3 z to logic discrimination time delayed output I0 gt IsO CSH core bal CT l CT CSH30 core bal ACE990 Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves Definite time protection principle IO gt IsO time delayed output IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 371 12 standards IO gt IsO pick up signal y type 1 A lt type 1 2 DE50247 value of internal time delay counter 1 42 10 20 s I0 IsO IDMT protection principle 3 24 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions 1 InO In if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement
64. wiring User Machine Interface 2 levels of User Machine Interface UMI are available according to the user s needs m basic UMI an economical solution for installations that do not require local operation run via a remote monitoring and control system m fixed or remote advanced UMI a graphic LCD display and 9 key keypad are used to display the measurement and diagnosis values alarm and operating messages and provide access to protection and parameter setting values for installations that are operated locally Setting and operating software The SFT2841 PC software tool gives access to all the Sepam functions with all the facilities and convenience provided by a Windows type environment s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Sepam series 20 Selection table Protection ANSI code S20 T20 M20 B21 B22 Phase overcurrent 50 51 4 4 4 Earth fault Sensitive earth fault 50N 51N 4 4 4 50G 51G Negative sequence unbalance 46 1 1 1 Thermal overload 49RMS 2 2 Phase undercurrent 37 1 Excessive starting time locked rotor 48 51LR 14 1 Starts per hour 66 1 Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 47 2 2 Remanent undervoltage 27R 1 1 Phase to phase undervoltage 27 2 2 Phase to neutral undervoltage 278 1 1 Phase to phase overvoltage 59 2 2 Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 Overfrequency 81H 1 1 Underfrequency 81L 2 2 Rate of change of frequency 81R 1 Recloser 4 cycles 79 o Thermostat Buchholz 26 63 Oo Temperature monitoring
65. 0 0 0078 0 0086 0 0094 0 0102 0 0110 0 0118 0 0126 0 0134 0 0142 0 0150 0 0157 0 0165 0 0173 0 0181 0 0189 0 0197 0 0205 0 0213 0 0221 0 0229 0 0237 0 0245 0 0253 0 0261 0 0269 0 0277 0 0285 0 0293 0 0301 0 0309 0 0317 8 50 0 0069 0 0076 0 0083 0 0090 0 0097 0 0104 0 0111 0 0118 0 0125 0 0132 0 0139 0 0146 0 0153 0 0160 0 0167 0 0175 0 0182 0 0189 0 0196 0 0203 0 0210 0 0217 0 0224 0 0231 0 0238 0 0245 0 0252 0 0259 0 0266 0 0274 0 0281 9 00 0 0062 0 0068 0 0074 0 0081 0 0087 0 0093 0 0099 0 0105 0 0112 0 0118 0 0124 0 0130 0 0137 0 0143 0 0149 0 0156 0 0162 0 0168 0 0174 0 0181 0 0187 0 0193 0 0200 0 0206 0 0212 0 0218 0 0225 0 0231 0 0237 0 0244 0 0250 9 50 0 0056 0 0061 0 0067 0 0072 0 0078 0 0083 0 0089 0 0095 0 0100 0 0106 0 0111 0 0117 0 0123 0 0128 0 0134 0 0139 0 0145 0 0151 0 0156 0 0162 0 0168 0 0173 0 0179 0 0185 0 0190 0 0196 0 0201 0 0207 0 0213 0 0218 0 0224 10 00 0 0050 0 0055 0 0060 0 0065 0 0070 0 0075 0 0080 0 0085 0 0090 0 0095 0 0101 0 0106 0 0111 0 0116 0 0121 0 0126 0 0131 0 0136 0 0141 0 0146 0 0151 0 0156 0 0161 0 0166 0 0171 0 0177 0 0182 0 0187 0 0192 0 0197 0 0202 12 50 0 0032 0 0035 0 0038 0 0042 0 0045 0 0048 0 0051 0 0055 0 0058 0 0061 0 0064 0 0067 0 0071 0 0074 0 0077 0 0080 0 0084 0 0087 0 0090 0 0093 0 0096 0 0100 0 0103 0 0106 0 0109 0 0
66. 0 Address word 0104 TS49 to TS64 bit address 1040 to 104F TS Use 49 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 1 50 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 1 51 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 2 52 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 2 53 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 3 54 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 3 55 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 4 56 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 4 57 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 5 58 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 5 59 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 6 60 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 6 61 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 7 62 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 7 63 Protection 38 49T alarm set point sensor 8 64 Protection 38 49T tripping set point sensor 8 ef Merlin Gerin 20 T20 M20 B21 B21 B22 B22 5 15 Modbus communication Use of remote control orders Remote control orders are pre assigned to protection control and metering functions Remote control orders may be carried out in two modes m direct mode m confirmed SBO select before operate mode All the remote control orders may be inhibited by the logic input 125 on the MES114 module except for the remote control tripping order TC1 which can still be activated at any time Logic input 125 may be set up according to 2 modes m inhibited if the input is set to 1 POS prefix m inhibite
67. 0 heat rise of the thermal overload function When the motor re accelerates it undergoes a stress similar to that of starting without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of Ib in which case the number of starts is not incremented It is possible however to increment the number of starts when a re acceleration occurs by a logic data input input 122 Block diagram p 11 0 T I2 I gt 0 1lb P mn I3 gt 1 inhibit gt 1 resne closing MT10871 k2 gt N input 122 a P mn Nt k3 gt Nh thermal alarm hot state Clear Characteristics Period of time P Setting 1 to 6 hour Resolution 1 Nt total number of starts Setting 1 to 60 Resolution 1 Nh and Nc number of consecutive starts Setting 1 to Nt Resolution 1 T time delay between starts Setting 0 mn lt T lt 90 mn Resolution 1 mn or 1 digit 1 With Ne lt Nf 3 28 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Recloser ANSI code 79 Operation Initialization of the recloser The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met m CB control function activated and recloser in service m circuit breaker closed m inhibition time delay not running m none of the recloser inhibition conditions is true see further on Recloser cycles m case of a cleared fault O following a reclosing order if the fault does not appear after the memory time delay has run out the recloser reinitia
68. 0 3634 0 3415 0 3216 0 2578 0 2119 0 1776 0 1512 0 1304 0 1136 0 1000 0 0887 0 0792 0 0712 0 0644 0 0585 0 0534 115 0 4095 0 3835 0 3602 0 3390 0 2713 0 2227 0 1865 0 1586 0 1367 0 1191 0 1048 0 0929 0 0830 0 0746 0 0674 0 0612 0 0559 120 0 4317 0 4041 0 3792 0 3567 0 2849 0 2336 0 1954 0 1661 0 1431 0 1246 0 1096 0 0972 0 0868 0 0780 0 0705 0 0640 0 0584 125 0 4545 0 4250 0 3986 0 3747 0 2988 0 2446 0 2045 0 1737 0 1495 0 1302 0 1144 0 1014 0 0905 0 0813 0 0735 0 0667 0 0609 130 0 4778 0 4465 0 4184 0 3930 0 3128 0 2558 0 2136 0 1813 0 156 0 1358 0 1193 0 1057 0 0943 0 0847 0 0766 0 0695 0 0634 135 0 5016 0 4683 0 4386 0 4117 0 3270 0 2671 0 2228 0 1890 0 1625 0 1414 0 1242 0 1100 0 0982 0 0881 0 0796 0 0723 0 0659 140 0 5260 0 4907 0 4591 0 4308 0 3414 0 2785 0 2321 0 1967 0 1691 0 147 0 1291 0 1143 0 1020 0 0916 0 0827 0 0751 0 0685 145 0 5511 0 5136 0 4802 0 4502 0 3561 0 2900 0 2414 0 2045 0 1757 0 1527 0 1340 0 1187 0 1058 0 0950 0 0858 0 0778 0 0710 150 0 5767 0 5370 0 5017 0 4700 0 3709 0 3017 0 2509 0 2124 0 1823 0 1584 0 1390 0 1230 0 1097 0 0984 0 0889 0 0806 0 0735 155 0 6031 0 5610 0 5236 0 4902 0 3860 0 3135 0 2604 0 2203 0 189 0 1641 0 1440 0 1274 0 1136 0 1019 0 0920 0 0834 0 0761 160 0 6302 0 5856 0 5461 0 5108 0 4013 0 3254 0 2701 0 2283 0 1957 0 1699 0 1490 0 1318 0 1174 0 1054 0 0951 0 0863 0 0786 165 0 6580 0 6108 0 5690 0 5319 0 4169 0 3375 0 2798 0 2363 0 2025 0 1757 0 1540 0 1362 0 1213 0 1088 0 0982 0 0891 0 0812 170 0 6866 0 6366 0 5925 0
69. 0 847 0 643 0 442 0 362 15 5 0 836 0 621 0 414 0 334 16 0 0 827 0 600 0 388 0 308 16 5 0 817 0 581 0 365 0 285 17 0 0 808 0 563 0 344 0 265 17 5 0 800 0 545 0 324 0 246 18 0 0 792 0 529 0 307 0 229 18 5 0 784 0 514 0 290 0 214 19 0 0 777 0 500 0 275 0 200 19 5 0 770 0 486 0 261 0 188 20 0 0 763 0 474 0 248 0 176 1 Values only suitable for IEC A B and C curves PCRED301005EN June 2005 RI IEEEMI JEEEVI JEEEEI IACI IAC VI IEC D IEC E IEC F 3 062 nm 62 005 62 272 2 534 22 461 136 228 330 606 19 033 45 678 2 216 11 777 65 390 157 946 9 413 34 628 1 736 5 336 23 479 55 791 3 891 17 539 1 427 3 152 10 199 23 421 2 524 7 932 1 290 2 402 6 133 13 512 2 056 4 676 1 212 2 016 4 270 8 970 1 792 3 249 1 161 1 777 3 242 6 465 1 617 2 509 1 126 1 613 2 610 4 924 1 491 2 076 1 101 1 492 2 191 3 903 1 396 1 800 1 081 1 399 1 898 3 190 1 321 1 610 1 065 1 325 1 686 2 671 1 261 1 473 1 053 1 264 1 526 2 281 1 211 1 370 1 042 1 213 1 402 1 981 1 170 1 289 1 033 1 170 1 305 1 744 1 135 1 224 1 026 1 132 1 228 1 555 1 105 1 171 1 019 1 099 1 164 1 400 1 078 1 126 1 013 1 070 1 112 1 273 1 055 1 087 1 008 1 044 1 068 1 166 1 035 1 054 1 004 1 021 1 031 1 077 1 016 1 026 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 0 996 0 981 0 973 0 934 0 985 0 977 0 993 0 963 0 950 0 877 0 972 0 957 0 990 0 947 0 929 0 828 0 960 0 939 0 988 0 932 0 912 0 784 0 949 0 922 0 985 0 918 0 896 0 746 0 938 0 907 0 983 0 905 0 882 0 712 0 929 0 893 0 981 0 893 0 870 0
70. 0 X Sk MT10537 tsk Ts10 1 Ik ls 10 I Is Another practical method The table on the next page gives the values of _ _ts_ l ts10 as a function of is tsk Ts10 In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K in the line for IK Is The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the point k Ik tk is T Example Data type of time delay standard inverse time SIT set point Is a point k on the operation curve k 3 5 Is 4 s Question What is the time delay T setting operation time at 10 Is Reading of the table SIT column line 3 5 Is K 1 86 4 Answer The time delay setting is T T gt 2 15 Ss Problem 3 Knowing the current Is and time delay T settings for a type of time delay standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse find the operation time for a current value of IA On the standard curve of the same type read the operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative current IA Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current La 10 The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings is T tA tsAx Ts10 is E tA T tsA Ts10 1 IA Is 10 I Is CEN PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Another practical method the table below gives the values of _ _ts anor d To40 as a function of is In the column that corresponds to the type tsA ft
71. 05EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 15 Use Advanced UMI Blue keys for parameter and protection setting key on b51 bet b gt 5IN b gt 5iN ext O off lon Trip MT10810 The status key is used to display and enter the Sepam general settings including setting the Sepam date and time They define the protected equipment characteristics and the different optional modules The protection key is used to display set and enable or disable the protection units on b5 be St b gt SIN b gt 5N ext Ooff lon Trip MT10811 50 51 Off On O inverse Threshold 110A Delay 100 ms ot The wrench key is used to enter the passwords for access to the different modes m protection setting m parameter setting and return to operating mode with no passwords on b5 bbe 51 b gt SIN b gt gt SIN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10808 passwords am Dm 7 16 fq MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use Advanced UMI Blue keys for parameter and protection setting oy The key is used to confirm the protection settings parameter settings and passwords on b5 gt Si lo gt 5IN b gt 5IN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10812 50 51 On o On Trip Curve S F Threshold 550A Delay 600 ms on b5 be St lo gt SIN b gt 5N ext Ooff lon Trip MT10812 When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the a key is used to move
72. 1 7866 1 60 0 2173 0 2419 0 2671 0 2929 0 3194 0 3467 0 3747 0 4035 0 4332 0 4638 0 4953 0 5279 0 5616 0 5964 0 6325 0 6700 0 7089 0 7494 0 7916 0 8356 0 8817 0 9301 0 9808 1 0343 1 0908 1 1507 1 2144 1 2825 1 3555 1 4343 1 5198 1 65 0 2029 0 2257 0 2490 0 2728 0 2972 0 3222 0 3479 0 3743 0 4013 0 4292 0 4578 0 4872 0 5176 0 5489 0 5812 0 6146 0 6491 0 6849 0 7220 0 7606 0 8007 0 8424 0 8860 0 9316 0 9793 1 0294 1 0822 1 1379 1 1970 1 2597 1 3266 1 70 0 1900 0 2111 0 2327 0 2548 0 2774 0 3005 0 3241 0 3483 0 3731 0 3986 0 4247 0 4515 0 4790 0 5074 0 5365 0 5666 0 5975 0 6295 0 6625 0 6966 0 7320 0 7686 0 8066 0 8461 0 8873 0 9302 0 9751 1 0220 1 0713 1 1231 1 1778 1 75 0 1782 0 1980 0 2181 0 2386 0 2595 0 2809 0 3028 0 3251 0 3480 0 3714 0 3953 0 4199 0 4450 0 4708 0 4973 0 5245 0 5525 0 5813 0 6109 0 6414 0 6729 0 7055 0 7391 0 7739 0 8099 0 8473 0 8861 0 9265 0 9687 1 0126 1 0586 1 80 0 1676 0 1860 0 2048 0 2239 0 2434 0 2633 0 2836 0 3043 0 3254 0 3470 0 3691 0 3917 0 4148 0 4384 0 4626 0 4874 0 5129 0 5390 0 5658 0 5934 0 6217 0 6508 0 6809 0 7118 0 7438 0 7768 0 8109 0 8463 0 8829 0 9209 0 9605 3 17 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS Setting examples Cold curves for Es0 0 I Ib 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4
73. 1 Residual current mode 12 Rated residual current Ino 13 Integration period 14 Reserved 15 Rated primary voltage Unp 16 Rated secondary voltage Uns 17 Voltages mesured by VTs 18 Residual voltage mode Format Unit 0 50 Hz 1 60 Hz 1 disabled 0 English 1 Customized language 1 0 Setting group A 1 Setting group B 2 setting group A and B 3 Choice by input 113 4 Choice by remote control 5 Logic discrimination 0 TMS 1 10I Is O TC5A 1 TC1A 2 LPTC 0 3TC l1 12 13 1 2 TC l1 I3 gt gt 0 3l sum 1 2 A rated CSH 2 20 A rated CSH 3 1ACT CSH 4 5 ACT CSH 5 ACE990 Range 1 6 ACE990 Range 2 A 0 5mn 1 10mn 2 15mn 3 30 mn 4 60 mn V 0 100V 1 110V 2 115V 3 120V 4 200 V 5 230 V 0 3 V V1 V2 V3 U21 U32 1 U U21 none 3 V sum external VT Uns 3 external VT Uns 3 N G oOonm Ool n PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Access to remote settings Protection settings They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes ANSI 27 Phase to phase undervoltage Function number 10xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or disabled o 2 Us set point Unp 3 Tripping time delay 10 ms 4to8 Reserved ANSI 27D 47 Positive sequence undervoltage Function number 08xx PCRED301005EN June 2005 Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or disable
74. 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 This information is encoded in binary form Sepam is time set via the write word function function 16 at the address 0002 with a mandatory 4 word time message The bits set to O in the description above correspond to format fields which are not used and not generated by Sepam Since these bits can be transmitted to Sepam with random values Sepam performs the necessary disabling Sepam does not check the consistency or validity of the date and time received Synchronization clock A synchronization clock is required for setting the date and time of Sepam Schneider Electric has tested the following equipment Gorgy Timing ref RT 300 equipped with the M540 module 5 17 Modbus communication Reading of events Sepam provides the master or masters with two event tables The master reads the event table and acknowledges by writing the exchange word Sepam updates its event table The events sent by Sepam are not sorted chronologically Structure of the first event table m exchange word 0040h m event number 1 0041h 0048h m event number 2 0049h 0050h m event number 3 0051h 0058h m event number 4 0059h 0060h Structure of the second event table m exchange word 0070h m event number 1 0071h 0078h m event number 2 0079h 0080h m event number 3 0081h 0088h m event number 4
75. 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 11A 11B 11C 11D 11E 11F 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 12A 131 132 1EF Data addresses and encoding Status zone The status zone is a table which contains the Sepam check word pre assigned remote annunciation bits TS and logic inputs Bit address 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 Measurement zone 20 T20 M20 types Access D D D D D D VD DD D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Prohibited ef Merlin Gerin Access D D DdD D D Dd Modbus function enabled 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Modbus function Format enabled 3 4 or 1 2 7 3 4 or 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 Format 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16S wi w w w W Xx Unit 0 1 A 0 1 A 0 1 A 0 1 A 0 1 A 0 1 A 0 1 A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 10A 10A 10A 1A 1 kA 1 ms 1 sec 1hr 1 min 1 min Ib 0 1 sec 1A 1 min 1 C PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Measurements U21 phase to phase voltage x1 U32 phase to phase voltage x1 U
76. 112 device closed 011 125 remote control disable T 200 ms close order J i 112 device close order by recloser closed Block diagram Sepam B21 or B22 125 pressure drop SF6 1 T 0 z1 126 pressure drop SF6 2 T 200 ms oo trip circuit fault sA Ji 02 inhibit closing 2 121 external tripping 1 122 external tripping 2 123 external tripping 3 71 24 TC1 open order o T vi T 200 ms tripping shunt undervoltage A O11 T 200 ms close order 112 device A A closed 1 Data used in the logic block diagram depend on the Sepam type availability of MES114 option and general parameters 2 The usual case in which O2 is set to undervoltage coil normaly closed 3 Performs B20 type functions 114 external tripping 4 112 device closed TC2 close order 125 remote control disable 4 6 s O PCRED301005EN June 2005 MT10188 MT10190 MT10191 Control and monitoring Circuit breaker contactor control functions Latching acknowledgment The tripping outputs of all the protection functions and all the logic inputs may be latched individually Logic outputs may not be latched The logic outputs set up in pulse mode maintain pulse type operation even when linked to latched data Latched data are saved in the event of a power failure All latched data may be acknowledged locally on the UMI or remotely by means of a logic input or via the communication link Th
77. 113 0 0116 0 0119 0 0122 0 0126 0 0129 15 00 0 0022 0 0024 0 0027 0 0029 0 0031 0 0033 0 0036 0 0038 0 0040 0 0042 0 0045 0 0047 0 0049 0 0051 0 0053 0 0056 0 0058 0 0060 0 0062 0 0065 0 0067 0 0069 0 0071 0 0074 0 0076 0 0078 0 0080 0 0083 0 0085 0 0087 0 0089 17 50 0 0016 0 0018 0 0020 0 0021 0 0023 0 0025 0 0026 0 0028 0 0029 0 0031 0 0033 0 0034 0 0036 0 0038 0 0039 0 0041 0 0043 0 0044 0 0046 0 0047 0 0049 0 0051 0 0052 0 0054 0 0056 0 0057 0 0059 0 0061 0 0062 0 0064 0 0066 20 00 0 0013 0 0014 0 0015 0 0016 0 0018 0 0019 0 0020 0 0021 0 0023 0 0024 0 0025 0 0026 0 0028 0 0029 0 0030 0 0031 0 0033 0 0034 0 0035 0 0036 0 0038 0 0039 0 0040 0 0041 0 0043 0 0044 0 0045 0 0046 0 0048 0 0049 0 0050 3 19 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS Setting examples Hot curves I Ib 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 105 0 6690 0 2719 0 1685 0 1206 0 0931 0 0752 0 0627 0 0535 0 0464 0 0408 0 0363 0 0326 0 0295 0 0268 0 0245 0 0226 110 3 7136 0 6466 0 3712 0 2578 0 1957 0 1566 0 1296 0 1100 0 0951 0 0834 0 0740 0 0662 0 0598 0 0544 0 0497 0 0457 115 1 2528 0 6257 0 4169 0 3102 0 2451 0 2013 0 1699 0 1462 0 1278 0 1131 0 1011 0 0911 0 0827 0 0755 0 0693 120 3 0445 0 9680 0 6061 0 4394 0 3423 0 2786 0 2336 0 2002 0 1744 0 1539 0 1372 0 1234 0 1118 0 1020 0 0935 125 1 4925 0 8398 0 587
78. 114E MES114F or MET148 2 input output module options 1 For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit 2 Exclusive choice between logic discrimination and switching from one 2 relay group of settings to another 2 relay group 3 Performs Sepam B20 functions f Merlin Gerin 1 3 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Sepam series 20 Technical characteristics Minimum Minimum weight base unit with basic UMI and without MES114 1 2kg 00 base unit with basic UMI and without MES114 1 2 kg Maximum weight base unit with advanced UMI and Maximum weight base unit with advanced UMI and MES114 1 7kg 14 1 7kg Current transformer Input impedance 002 impedance lt 0 02 Q 1 A or 5 A CT with CCA630 Consumption lt 002VAat1A lt 0 02 VAat1A 1 A to 6250 A ratings lt 0 5 VAat5A Rated thermal withstand 4 In 1 second overload 100 In Voltage transformer Input impedance gt 100 kQ 220 V to 250 kV ratings Input voltage 100 to 230 V3 V Rated thermal withstand 240 V 1 second overload 480V Type of sensor eee eee N007120 of sensor Pt 100 Ni 100 120 Isolation from earth None None Current Currentinjectedinsensor AeA eee in sensor 4mA 4mA Maximum distance between sensor andmodule i s s KM yya Logicinputs MES114 MES114E MESTIE Voltage eee 2Ato250VDC 110t0o125VDC 110VAC 220t0o250VDC 220to240VAC DC 110to125VDC 110VAC 220 to 250 VDC 220 to 240 V AC Range Range T92t0275VDC 88to150VDC 88to132VAC 176to275VDC 176to264VAC Frequen
79. 13 14 15 16 17 18 Data Enable or disabled Negative sequence factor Is set point for switching from group A group B Accounting for ambient temperature Maximum equipment temperature Reserved Reserved Group A heatrise alarm set point Group A heatrise tripping set point Group A heating time constant Group A cooling time constant Group A initial heatrise value Group B enabled or disabled Group B heatrise alarm set point Group B heatrise tripping set point Group B heating time constant Group B cooling time constant Group B initial heatrise value ANSI 50 51 Phase current 5 28 Function number 01xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data 1 Reserved 2 Group A tripping curve 3 Group A Is set point 4 Group A tripping time delay 5 Group A timer hold curve 6 Group A timer hold delay 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 ON OFF 10 Group B tripping curve 11 Group B Is set point 12 Group B tripping time delay 13 Group B timer hold curve 14 Group B timer hold delay 15 Reserved 16 Reserved ef Merlin Gerin Access to remote settings Format Unit Q Ib 10 ms Format Unit Ib 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms Format Unit Q Ib D C minutes minutes minutes minutes Format Unit 0 1 A 10 ms 10 ms Q 0 1A 10 ms 10 ms PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301005EN June 2005 Access t
80. 13 phase to phase voltage x1 V1 phase to neutral voltage x1 V2 phase to neutral voltage x1 V3 phase to neutral voltage x1 VO residual voltage x1 Positive sequence voltage x1 Frequency U21 phase to phase voltage x10 U32 phase to phase voltage x10 U13 phase to phase voltage x10 V1 phase to neutral voltage x10 V2 phase to neutral voltage x10 V3 phase to neutral voltage x10 VO residual voltage x10 Positive sequence voltage x10 Reserved Reserved Accuracy The accuracy of the measurements depends on the order of the unit it is equal to the value of the point divided by 2 Remote control bits TC1 TC16 STC1 STC16 Analog output control Protection settings Setting read buffer Setting read request Remote setting request buffer See section on protection settings PCRED301005EN June 2005 Word address 106 107 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 131 132 1EF Word address 01FO 01F 1 01F2 Word address 2000 207C 2080 2100 217C Data addresses and encoding Measurement zone B20 B21 B22 types Access d D D D D D d Dd DY DdD D D Dd Dd D D DdD D Prohibited Examples 11 U21 Modbus function enabled 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Unit 1A Unit 10 V Remote control zone The remote control zone is a table which contains the pre assig
81. 1660 Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 1 communication port Sepam series 80 2 communication ports RS 485 network cable RS 485 medium 2 shielded twisted pairs Distributed power supply 1 shielded twisted pair Shielding Tinned copper braid coverage gt 65 Characteristic impedance 120 Q Gauge AWG 24 Resistance per unit length lt 100 Q km Capacitance between conductors lt 60 pF m Capacitance between conductor lt 100 pF m and shielding Maximum length 1300 m Fiber type Multimode glass Wavelength 820 nm infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum diameter um aperture attenuation power available length of NA dBm km dBm fiber m 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 700 62 5 125 9 4 1800 100 140 14 9 2800 200 HCS 0o37 6 192 2600 6 26 s O PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation PE50029 ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network connection interface DE51661 1 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected 2 wire S RS 485 network B B A A B B IA A 2 wire RS 485 network Power supply 12 or 24V DC V V A JA V I Yi Ll LN LN L JOTE v V IV Power supply 12 or 24 V DC PCRED301005EN June 2005 ACE949 2 ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface Function The ACE949 2 interface performs 2 functions m electrical interface between Sepam and a 2 wire RS
82. 172 0 0190 0 0207 0 0225 0 0242 0 0260 0 0277 0 0295 0 0313 0 0330 0 0348 PCRED301005EN June 2005 6 00 0 0014 0 0029 0 0043 0 0057 0 0072 0 0086 0 0101 0 0115 0 0129 0 0144 0 0158 0 0173 0 0187 0 0202 0 0217 0 0231 0 0246 0 0261 0 0275 0 0290 6 50 0 0012 0 0024 0 0036 0 0049 0 0061 0 0073 0 0085 0 0097 0 0110 0 0122 0 0134 0 0147 0 0159 0 0171 0 0183 0 0196 0 0208 0 0221 0 0233 0 0245 7 00 0 0010 0 0021 0 0031 0 0042 0 0052 0 0063 0 0073 0 0084 0 0094 0 0105 0 0115 0 0126 0 0136 0 0147 0 0157 0 0168 0 0179 0 0189 0 0200 0 0211 Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS Setting examples 7 50 0 0009 0 0018 0 0027 0 0036 0 0045 0 0054 0 0064 0 0073 0 0082 0 0091 0 0100 0 0109 0 0118 0 0128 0 0137 0 0146 0 0155 0 0164 0 0173 0 0183 8 00 0 0008 0 0016 0 0024 0 0032 0 0040 0 0048 0 0056 0 0064 0 0072 0 0080 0 0088 0 0096 0 0104 0 0112 0 0120 0 0128 0 0136 0 0144 0 0152 0 0160 8 50 0 0007 0 0014 0 0021 0 0028 0 0035 0 0042 0 0049 0 0056 0 0063 0 0070 0 0077 0 0085 0 0092 0 0099 0 0106 0 0113 0 0120 0 0127 0 0134 0 0141 9 00 0 0006 0 0013 0 0019 0 0025 0 0031 0 0038 0 0044 0 0050 0 0056 0 0063 0 0069 0 0075 0 0082 0 0088 0 0094 0 0101 0 0107 0 0113 0 0119 0 0126 9 50 0 0006 0 0011 0 0017 0 0022 0 0028 0 0034 0 0039 0 0045 0 0051 0 0056 0 0062 0 0067 0 0073 0 0079 0 0084 0 0090 0
83. 2 display of switchgear network diagnosis data 3 display of alarm messages 4 resetting 6 acknowledgment and clearing of alarms O blue keys activated in parameter and protection setting mode 7 access to protection settings access to Sepam parameters settings including date and time used to enter the 2 passwords required to change protection and parameter settings The 1 A W 4 keys are used to browse through the menus and to scroll and accept the values displayed 6 lamp test keys switching on sequence of all the signal lamps b51 b gt 51 lo gt S5IN b gt 5iN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10822 1 Date time saved in case the auxiliary power supply fails lt 24 hours 7 12 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use Access to measurements and parameters The measurements and parameters may be accessed using the metering diagnosis status and protection keys They are arranged in a series of screens as shown in the diagram opposite m the data are split up by category in 4 loops associated with the following 4 keys O key y measurements O key amp switchgear diagnosis and additional measurements O key general settings O key A protection settings m when the user presses a key the system moves on to the next screen in the loop When a screen includes more than 4 lines the user moves about in the screen via the cursor keys AV Protectio
84. 3 3 Protection functions Phase to phase undervoltage ANSI code 27 Operation The protection function is three phase m it picks up if one of the 3 phase to phase voltages drops below the Us set point m it includes a definite time delay T Block diagram o U21 T 0 l U32 U lt Us time delayed output U13 pick up signal Characteristics Us set point Setting 5 Unp to 100 Unp Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 2 5 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 4 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check ANSI code 27D 47 Operation Positive sequence undervoltage The protection picks up when the positive sequence component Vd of a three phase voltage system drops below the Vsd set point with gt 1 gt gt gt Vd 3 V14 V2 a V3 gt gt gt Vd U21 a U32 amp a wih V 4 andaze J3 m it includes a definite time delay T m it allows drops in motor electrical torque to be detected Phase rotation direction This protection also allows the phase rotation direction to be detected The protection considers that the phase rotation dire
85. 3 OCOO 0001 875A Reception 01 03 02 1234 B533 Function 8 Modbus diagnosis echo mode 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Transmission Reception Even in echo mode Sepam recalculates and checks the CRC sent by the master m If the CRC received is valid Sepam replies m If the CRC received is invalid Sepam does not reply PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning and diagnosis Modbus diagnosis counters Counter definition Sepam manages the Modbus diagnosis counters These are m CPT1 Number of valid frames received whether the slave is involved or not m CPT2 Number of frames received with a CRC error or physical error frames with more than 255 bytes frames received with at least one parity overrun framing or line break error m CPT3 Number of exception responses generated even if not transmitted due to receipt of a broadcast request m CPT4 Number of frames specifically addressed to the station excluding broadcasting m CPT5 Number of valid broadcast frames received m CPTE6 Not significant m CPT7 Not significant m CPT8 Number of frames received with at least one character having a physical error parity overrun framing or line break m CPT9 Number of valid requests received and correctly executed Counter reset The counters are reset to 0 m when they reach the maximum value FFFFh 65535 m when they are reset by a Modbus command function 8 m when Sepam auxiliary power is lost m when
86. 360 0 0328 170 0 3410 0 3122 0 2874 0 2657 0 2012 0 1591 0 1296 0 1080 0 0916 0 0788 0 0686 0 0603 0 0535 0 0478 0 0430 0 0389 0 0353 175 0 3705 0 3388 0 3115 0 2877 0 2173 0 1715 0 1395 0 1161 0 0984 0 0847 0 0737 0 0648 0 0574 0 0513 0 0461 0 0417 0 0379 180 0 4008 0 3660 0 3361 0 3102 0 2336 0 1840 0 1495 0 1244 0 1054 0 0906 0 0788 0 0692 0 0614 0 0548 0 0493 0 0446 0 0405 185 0 4321 0 3940 0 3614 0 3331 0 2502 0 1967 0 1597 0 1327 0 1123 0 0965 0 0839 0 0737 0 0653 0 0583 0 0524 0 0474 0 0431 190 0 4644 0 4229 0 3873 0 3567 0 2671 0 2096 0 1699 0 1411 0 1193 0 1025 0 0891 0 0782 0 0693 0 0619 0 0556 0 0503 0 0457 195 0 4978 0 4525 0 4140 0 3808 0 2842 0 2226 0 1802 0 1495 0 1264 0 1085 0 0943 0 0828 0 0733 0 0654 0 0588 0 0531 0 0483 200 0 5324 0 4831 0 4413 0 4055 0 3017 0 2358 0 1907 0 1581 0 1335 0 1145 0 0995 0 0873 0 0773 0 0690 0 0620 0 0560 0 0509 3 20 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Hot curves I Ib 4 80 Es 105 0 0023 110 0 0045 115 0 0068 120 0 0091 125 0 0114 130 0 0137 135 0 0160 140 0 0183 145 0 0206 150 0 0229 155 0 0253 160 0 0276 165 0 0299 170 0 0323 175 0 0346 180 0 0370 185 0 0393 190 0 0417 195 0 0441 200 0 0464 5 00 0 0021 0 0042 0 0063 0 0084 0 0105 0 0126 0 0147 0 0168 0 0189 0 0211 0 0232 0 0253 0 0275 0 0296 0 0317 0 0339 0 0361 0 0382 0 0404 0 0426 5 50 0 0017 0 0034 0 0051 0 0069 0 0086 0 0103 0 0120 0 0138 0 0155 0 0
87. 40 o communication module link connection green o D remote inter module link connection black m optional input output module MES108 or MES114 O O M MES108 or MES114 module connectors o K MES114 module connector DE52149 S eC S OSS GKO GROSS S D D O Q O Q O Q O O o SAOSA Sg SO 2 2 1 D mM 2q IS SSOSKGSOSKOVSSGsS S Connection of the base unit The Sepam connections are made to the removable connectors located on the rear panel All the connectors are screw lockable For safety reasons access to dangerous potentials all the terminals must be screwed tight whether or not they are used Wiring of the CCA620 connector m without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm 2 AWG 24 16 O stripped length 8 to 10 mm m with fitting O recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm O tube length 8 2 mm O stripped length 8 mm Wiring of the CCA622 connector m ring lug connectors 6 35 mm 1 4 Characteristics of the 4 base unit relay outputs 0O01 O2 O3 O4 m O1 and O2 are 2 control outputs used by the breaking device control function for O O1 breaking device tripping O O2 breaking device closing inhibition m O3 and O4 are indication
88. 59621 59622 59624 59625 59630 59631 59632 59634 59635 59636 59639 59641 59642 59643 59644 59646 59647 59648 59649 59650 59651 59652 59660 59661 59662 59663 59664 59666 59667 59668 59669 59670 59672 59676 59679 59720 59721 Base unit with basic UMI 24 250 V DC and 100 240 V AC power supply Base unit with advanced UMI 24 250 V DC and 100 240 V AC power supply DSM303 remote advanced UMI module Working language English French Working language English Spanish Substation application type S20 Transformer application type T20 Motor application type M20 Busbar application type B21 Busbar application type B22 CCA630 connector for 1A 5A CT current sensors CCA670 connector for LPCT current sensors CCT640 connector for VT voltage sensors CSHS30 interposing ring CT for lo input CSH120 residual current sensor diameter 120 mm CSH200 residual current sensor diameter 200 mm AMT852 lead sealing accessory MET148 2 8 temperature sensor module ACE949 2 wire RS 485 network interface ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 optical fibre interface MES114 10 input 4 output module 24 250 V DC MSA141 1 analog output module ACE909 2 RS 485 RS 232 convertor ACE919CA RS 485 RS 485 interface AC power supply ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 interface CC power supply MES114E 10 input 4 output module 110 125 V DC and V AC MES114F 10 input 4 output module 220 250 V DC and V AC CCA
89. 6 15 6 16 6 18 6 19 6 21 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 36 6 1 Installation Precautions We recommend that you follow the instructions given in this document for quick correct installation of your Sepam m equipment identification m assembly m connection of current and voltage inputs probes m connection of power supply m checking prior to commissioning Handling transport and storage Sepam in its original packaging Transport Sepam may be shipped to any destination without talking any additional precautions by all usual means of transport Handling Sepam may be handled without any particular care and can even withstand being dropped by a person handling it person standing on floor Storage Sepam may be stored in its original packaging in an appropriate location for several years m temperature between 25 C and 70 C m humidity lt 90 Periodic yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is recommended Once Sepam has been unpacked it should be energized as soon as possible Sepam installed in a cubicle Transport Sepam may be transported by all usual means of transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles Storage conditions should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport Handling Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle check its condition by visual inspection and energizing
90. 770 remote module cord L 0 6 m CCA772 remote module cord L 2 m CCA774 remote module cord L 4 m CCA612 RS 485 network interface communication cord L 3m CCA783 PC connection cord CCA613 LPCT remote test plug ACE917 LPCT injection adapter CCA620 20 pin screw type connector CCA622 20 pin ring lug connector AMT840 mounting plate ACE990 core balance CT interface for lo input Kit 2640 2 sets of spare connectors SFT2841 CD ROM with SFT2841 and SFT2826 software without CCA783 cord ACE969TP 2 wire RS 485 multi protocol interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 ACE969FO fiber optic multi protocol interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 1 List of references cancelled and replaced m 59602 base unit with basic UMI 24 V DC power supply cancelled and replaced by reference 59603 m 59606 base unit with advanced UMI 24 V DC power supply cancelled and replaced by reference 59607 m 59645 MES108 41 40 module cancelled and replaced by reference 59646 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 6 3 DE50928 DE50926 Installation Base unit Dimensions Dimensions DE52066 DE51846 9o0000000000 alls 00000 222 176 gt Top view of Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114 flush mounted in front panel 1 With basic UMI 23 mm 176 gt Front view of Sepam Side view of Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114 flush mounted in front panel Clearance for Sepam assembly
91. 8 0 4499 0 38623 0 3017 0 2572 0 2231 0 1963 0 1747 0 1568 0 1419 0 1292 0 1183 130 2 6626 1 1451 0 7621 0 5705 0 4537 0 3747 0 3176 0 2744 0 2407 0 2136 0 1914 0 1728 0 1572 0 1438 135 1 5870 0 9734 0 7077 0 5543 0 4535 0 3819 0 3285 0 2871 0 2541 0 2271 0 2048 0 1860 0 1699 140 2 3979 1 2417 0 8668 0 6662 0 5390 0 4507 0 3857 0 3358 0 2963 0 2643 0 2378 0 2156 0 1967 145 1 6094 1 0561 0 7921 0 6325 0 5245 0 4463 0 3869 0 3403 0 3028 0 2719 0 2461 0 2243 150 2 1972 1 2897 0 9362 0 7357 0 6042 0 5108 0 4408 0 3864 0 3429 0 3073 0 2776 0 2526 155 3 8067 1 5950 1 1047 0 8508 0 6909 0 5798 0 4978 0 4347 0 3846 0 3439 0 3102 0 2817 160 2 0369 1 3074 0 9808 0 7857 0 6539 0 5583 0 4855 0 4282 0 3819 0 3438 0 3118 165 2 8478 1 5620 1 1304 0 8905 0 7340 0 6226 0 5390 0 4738 0 4215 0 3786 0 3427 170 1 9042 1 3063 1 0076 0 8210 0 6914 0 5955 0 5215 0 4626 0 4146 0 3747 175 2 4288 1 5198 1 1403 0 9163 0 7652 0 6554 0 5717 0 5055 0 4520 0 4077 180 3 5988 1 7918 1 2933 1 0217 0 8449 0 7191 0 6244 0 5504 0 4908 0 4418 185 2 1665 1 4739 1 1394 0 9316 0 7872 0 6802 0 5974 0 5312 0 4772 190 2 7726 1 6946 1 2730 1 0264 0 8602 0 7392 0 6466 0 5733 0 5138 195 4 5643 1 9782 1 4271 1 1312 0 9390 0 8019 0 6985 0 6173 0 5518 200 2 3755 1 6094 1 2483 1 0245 0 8688 0 7531 0 6633 0 5914 I Ib 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 105 0 0209 0 0193 0 0180 0 0168 0 0131 0 0106 0 0087 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0047 0 0042 0 0037 0 0033
92. 90 Drop out pick up ratio Harmonic 2 restraint Fixed threshold Time delay T operation time at 10 Is0 Setting Resolution Accuracy 2 Definite time IDMT Definite time IDMT Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold IDMT 4 Characteristic times Operation time Overshoot time Reset time Definite time IDMT chosen according to list on previous page 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 InO expressed in Amps 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 InO 0 2 A to 30 A 2 A to 300 A 0 1 InO lt IsO lt 15 InO min 0 1 A 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 InO 0 1 In0 lt IsO lt Ind expressed in Amps 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt InO 0 2 Ato2A 2Ato20A 0 1 InO lt IsO lt InO min 0 1 A 0 1 InO lt IsO lt InO 0 1 Aor 1 digit 5 or 0 01 InO 93 5 5 with CSH sensor CT CSH30 or core balance CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 InO IsO x 100 sum of CTs 17 5 inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS 10 ms or 1 digit 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms S S 0 0 05 to 300 s 0 5 to 300 s pick up lt 35 ms at 2 IsO typically 25 ms confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 IsO for IsO 2 0 3 InO typically 35 ms Em inst lt 70 ms at 2 IsO for IsO lt 0 3 InO typically 50 ms lt 35 ms lt 40 ms for T1 0 3 25 Protection functions Phase to phase overvoltage ANSI code 59 Operation This
93. A A ay on b51 bet b gt 5iN b gt SiN ext O off lon Trip The alarms key is used to consult the 16 most recent alarms that have not yet been cleared MT10287 0 lo FAULT A 7 14 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use Advanced UMI White keys for current operation key The reset key resets Sepam extinction of signal lamps and resetting of protection units after the disappearance of faults The alarm messages are not erased on b5 bt b gt 5IN b gt gt SIN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10906 2001 10 06 12 40 50 PHASE FAULT 1A Trip 11 162A N Trip 12 161A Trip 13 250A reset N b5 51 lo gt SIN b gt 5IN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10833 When an alarm is present on the Sepam display the clear key is used to return to the screen that was present prior to the appearance of the alarm or to a less recent unacknowledged alarm Sepam is not reset In the metering or diagnosis or alarm menus the clear key may be used to reset the average currents peak 1 max 1 80 A demand currents running hours counter and alarm stack when they are shown on the display lI gt max 1 81 A I3max 180A on N b51 b gt 5i b gt SIN b gt 5N ext Ooff lon Tip MT10283 Press the lamp test key for 5 seconds to start up a LED and display test sequence When an alarm is present the lamp test key is disabled l1 162A rus I2 161A rms I3 163A rms PCRED3010
94. A772 or CCA774 cords 0 6 2 or 4 meters The analog output may also be remotely managed via the communication network Characteristics Weight 0 2 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Current 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Scaling no data input checking Minimum value Maximum value Load impedance lt 600 Q wiring included Accuracy 0 5 Phase and residual currents O1A m e Phase to neutral and phase to phase ee gn ga voltages Frequency 0 01Hz m m m Thermal capacity used 1 E m m Temperatures K C L Active power ow e je Reactive power owa u a Apparent power owa a o a Power factor oot Remote setting via communication link ss rms ms Description and dimensions A Terminal block for analog output a RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Grounding earthing terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m X6 if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module Connection Earthing terminal connection By tinned copper braid with cross section 2 6 mm or cable with cross section gt 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm ring lug Check the tightn
95. C or 24 V DC Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12 distributed supply Operating temperature 5 C to 55 C 5 ns fast transient bursts 60255 22 4 4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255 22 1 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 1 2 50 us impulse wave 60255 5 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters Description and dimensions A Terminal block for 2 wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS 485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block DE52172 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 ON OFF LED on if ACE919 is energized 4 SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q 2 wire RS 485 network impedance matching by 150 Q resistor DE50038 Converter configuration when delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated
96. CT Procedure m connect the single phase current generator to inject current into the primary circuit of the core balance CT or the CT in accordance with the diagram below TEICHIT Ogrmyo Sepam 20 T20 M20 test terminal box m turn on the generator m inject a 5 A primary residual current m use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equalto5A m turn the generator off J Merlin Gerin 7 27 Commissioning Checking phase voltage input connection Description Check to be carried out for Sepam B21 or B22 Procedure m to apply a phase to neutral voltage to the phase 1 voltage input connect the single phase voltage generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided in ccordance with the diagram below DE52246 Sepam B21 B22 Test terminal m turn the generator on m apply the VT rated secondary phase to neutral voltage Uns V3 m use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase to neutral voltage V1 value is equal to the VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage Unp V3 m if the residual voltage is calculated by the sum of the 3 voltages use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual voltage is approximately equal to the VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage Unp V3 m turn the generator off m proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase voltage inputs m at the end of the test put the cover back on the test termina
97. DE51855 DE51856 ACE969TP 9 S LAN fiber optic communication port ACE969FO 2 wire RS485 communication ports 1 2 wire RS485 network terminal block Port S LAN ACE969TP Port E LAN ACE969TP or m 2 black terminals connection of RS485 twisted ACE969FO pair 2 wires m 2 green terminals connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply 2 Indication LEDs m flashing Tx LED Sepam sending m flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 3 Clamps and recovery of shielding for two network cables incoming and outgoing inner diameter of clamp 6 mm 4 Fixing stud for network cable ties 5 Jumper for RS485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 Q to be set to m FXG if the interface is not at the line end default position m Rc if the interface is at the line end DE51863 DE51864 Fiber optic communication port 1 Indication LEDs Port S LAN ACE969FO m flashing Tx LED Sepam sending 4 m flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending DE51865 6 32 s Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation DE52166 2 wire Power supply RS 485 network B B A A DE52078 B BA A V V Ring connection DE52165 PCRED301005EN June 2005 CCA612 Optic star connection star Rx Tx Rx Tx ACE969FO ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol
98. Electrical network protection Sepam series 20 User s manual June 2005 a brand of Schneider Electric Contents Sepam series 20 Metering functions Protection functions Control and monitoring functions Modbus communication Installation Use PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Sepam series 20 Contents Presentation 1 2 Selection table 1 3 Technical characteristics 1 4 Environmental characteristics 1 5 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 1 1 PE50297 PE50298 PE50593 Sepam series 20 Sepam a modular solution Sepam with basic UMI and with fixed advanced UMI mE a 2 ee ee CE l irer l m r r Fie F E Example of an SFT2841 software screen 1 2 Presentation The Sepam series 20 family of protection and metering units is designed for the operation of machines and electrical distribution networks of industrial installations and utility substations for all levels of voltage The Sepam series 20 family consists of simple high performing solutions suited to demanding applications that call for current and voltage metering Sepam series 20 selection guide by application Selection criteria Series 20 Measurements U U Specific protection functions Loss of mains ROCOF Applications Substation Transformer Motor Busbar Main functions Protection m Overcurrent and earth fault protection with adjustable time reset a
99. Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Voltage DC 24 48V DC 127V DC 220 V DC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC 63 Hz Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity Load 2 1A 0 5A 0 15 A L R lt 20 ms Load 1A cos gt 0 3 Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms f Merlin Gerin 6 19 DE52153 DE51683 DE51685 Installation Yes Input Vac setting i SOOO99909090909A i DBOOVO9OO9S0O90O NoL_ g N SAA NO AD ao 40 115114 126 a 125 124 11312 T 122 5 12 iD nl ap BAONWO OOOOOO990O9 ve r CON OF Na a MES114 MES114E MES114F 6 20 f Merlin Gerin MES114 modules Description O M and kK 3 removable lockable screw type connectors L connectors for 4 relay outputs m O11 1 control relay output m O12 to O14 3 indication relay outputs M connectors for 4 independent logic inputs 111 to 114 K connectors for 6 logic inputs m 21 1 independent logic input m 22 to 126 5 common point logic inputs 1 25 pin sub D connector to connect the module to the base unit 2 voltage selector switche for MES114E and MES114F module inputs to be set to O V DC for 10 DC voltage inputs default setting O V AC for 10 AC voltage inputs 3 label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages The parameter setting status may be accessed in the Sepam Diagnosis scre
100. N engineering network DE52241 S LAN access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Sepam units on the The connection window allows configuration of the Sepam network and provides network To open the connection window click on the icon ry Sepam series 40 See Configuration of a Sepam network for details of how to configure the E LAN engineering network from the connection window BUEN coy Sepam series 80 eecececcces SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 3 Use SFT2841 setting and operating software Presentation All the setting and operating functions are available on the screen of a PC equipped with the SFT2841 software tool and connected to the PC connection port on the front panel of Sepam run in a Windows 2 V98 or NT environment All the data used for the same task are grouped together in the same screen to facilitate operation Menus and icons are used for fast direct access to the required information PE10051 Current operation m display of all metering and operation data m display of alarm messages with the time of appearance date hour mn s ms m display of diagnosis data such as tripping current number of switchgear operations and cumulative breaking current m display of all the protection and parameter settings m display of th
101. OJ P 0O O 12 13 14 15 16 Use Tripping Closing Swtiching to setting group A Switching to setting group B Sepam reset reset Peak demand current zero reset Inhibit thermal protection Inhibit disturbance recording triggering Confirm disturbance recording triggering Manual disturbance recording triggering Enable recloser Disable recloser Confirm thermal protection Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog output remote control The analog output of the MSA141 module may be set up for remote control via the Modbus communication module word address 01F2 The working range of the numerical value transmitted is defined by the parameter setting of the min value and max value of the analog output This function is not affected by remote control inhibition conditions ef Merlin Gerin S20 T20 M20 B21 B22 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Presentation The communication system time tags the data prcessed by Sepam The time tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes so that they can be accurately classified with over time Time tagged data are events that can be processed in the control room by the remote monitoring and control system using the communication protocol for data logging and chronological reports Sepam time tags the following data m logic inputs m remote annunciation bits m information pertaining to Sepam equipment see Sepam check word
102. Sepam network SFT2841 displays the list of all the modems installed on the PC The communication parameters to be defined are m modem select one of the modems listed by SFT2841 m telephone no no of the remote modem to be called m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m parity none not adjustable m handshake none RTS or RTS CTS m time out from 100 to 3000 ms Communication via modem and telephone network is slowed considerably because of the transit time through the modems A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most 38400 baud installations In some cases the poor quality of the telephone network may require a slower speed 9600 or 4800 bauds The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds m number of retries from 1 to 6 Note the speed and parity of the calling modem must be configured under Windows with the same values as for SFT2841 J Merlin Gerin 7 9 PE50590 Use Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem 7 10 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Configuration of called modem The modem on the Sepam side is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual Modem RS 485 interface In general the configuration paramet
103. Storage Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as possible Sepam like all electronic units should not be stored in a damp environment for more than a month Sepam should be energized as quickly as possible If this is not possible the cubicle reheating system should be activated Environment of the installed Sepam Operation in a damp environment The temperature relative humidity factors must compatible with the unit s environmental withstand characteristics If the use conditions are outside the normal zone commissioning arrangements should be made such as air conditioning of the premises Operation in a polluted atmosphere A contaminated industrial atmosphere components such as the presence of chlorine hydrofluoric acid sulfur solvents may cause corrosion of the electronic components in which case environmental control arrangements should be made such as closed pressurized premises with filtered air for commissioning The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested according to the IEC 60068 2 60 standard Sepam is certified level C under the following test conditions 21 days 25 C 75 relative humidity 1 ppm H2S 0 5 ppm SO2 6 2 Precautions Equipment identification Equipment identification Identification of the base unit Each Sepam comes in a single package which contains the base unit and the base unit 20 pin connector CCA620 or CCA622 The other optional accessories such a
104. The initial values may be introduced using the SFT2841 software tool to take into account the real state of a used breaking device Characteristics Breaking current kA Range 0 to 65535 kA Unit primary kA Accuracy 10 Number of operations Range 0 to 65535 1 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 J Merlin Gerin 2 15 Switchgear diagnosis functions 2 16 Operating time Charging time Operating time Operation This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device and change of status of the device open position contact connected to the 111 input The function is inhibited when the input is set for AC voltage 3 The value is saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES module 3 Optional MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 20 to 100 Unit ms Accuracy typically 1 ms Display format 3 significant digits Charging time Operation This function gives the value of the breaking device operating mechanism charging time determined according to the device closed position status change contact and the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam 112 and 124 2 The value is
105. This zone is read by a read word operation function 3 at the address 2000h The length of the exchange may include m the first word only validity test m the maximum size of the zone 125 mots m the usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The first word in the zone function code and relay number may have the following values m xxyy with O function code xx different from 00 and FFh O relay number yy different from FFh The settings are available and validated They word is a copy of the request frame The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made The other word are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply frame are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant m XXFFh with function code xx different from 00 and FFh The function for which the remote reading request has been made is not valid The function is not included in the particular Sepam or remote reading of it is not authorized refer to the list of functions which accommodate remote reading of settings 5 22 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Access to remote settings Remote setting Data that can be remotely set Writing of the settings of al
106. ach temperature monitoring function when activated detects whether the temperature sensor associated with the MET148 2 module is short circuited or disconnected When this is the case the alarm message RTD FAULT is generated Since this alarm is common to the 8 functions the identification of the faulty sensor or sensors is obtained by looking up the measured values m measurement displayed if the sensor is short circuited T lt 35 C m measurement displayed if the sensor is disconnected or T gt 205 C Replacement and repair When Sepam or a module is considered to be faulty have it replaced by a new product or module since the components cannot be repaired PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning Notes PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 35 Commissioning Notes 7 36 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Schneider Electric Industries SAS 89 boulevard Franklin Roosevelt F 92500 Rueil Malmaison France Tel 33 0 1 41 29 85 00 http Awww schneider electric com http Awww sepamrelay merlin gerin com PCRED301005EN 3 ART 08552 03146730EN HO 2005 Schneider Electric All rights reserved As standards specifications and designs change from time to time please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication Printed on ecological paper c Design Ameg Publication Schneider Electric Printed 06 2005
107. acs d O d O O O O d O A SVFOSGSORGoOVggs SSFOKSG SS Sg IS S 6 18 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 PE50476 Installation 10 input 4 output MES114 module PCRED301005EN June 2005 MES114 modules Function The 4 outputs included on the Sepam series 20 and 40 may be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs available in 3 versions m MES114 10 DC inputs voltage from from 24 V DC to 250 V DC m MES114 E 10 inputs voltage 110 125 V AC or V DC m MES114F 10 inputs voltage 220 250 V AC or V DC Characteristics Weight 0 28 kg Operating 25 C to 70 C temperature Environmental Same characteristics as Sepam base units characteristics Voltage 24 to 110 to 110 VAC 220 to 220 to 250 V DC 125 V DC 250VDC 240VAC Range 19 2 to 88 to 88 to 176 to 176 to 275 V DC 150 VV DC 132VAC 275VDC 264V AC Frequency 47 to 63Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical switching 14V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154VDC 120VAC threshold Input limit AtstateO 219VDC 288VDC 288VAC 2176VDC 2176V AC voltage Atstate1 lt 6VDC lt 75VDC lt 22VAC lt 137VDC lt 48VAC Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC 63 Hz Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive 8 4A 0 7 A 0 3 A 8A load Load 6 2A 0 5A 0 2A L R lt 20 ms Load 4 1A 0 2A 0 1A L R lt 40 ms Load 5A cos gt 0 3
108. acteristic times Operation time pick up lt 100 ms typically 80 ms Overshoot time lt 100 ms Reset time lt 100 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 31 Protection functions Underfrequency ANSI code 81L Operation The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is below the set point and if the negative sequence voltage is more than 20 of Vnp Unp V3 If a single VT is connected U21 the function picks up when the frequency is below the set point and the U21 voltage is more than 20 of Unp It includes a definite time delay T T 0 F lt Fs m time delayed output pick up sortie Block diagram U32 Vd Vd gt 0 2 Vnp 1 Or U21 gt 0 2 Unp if only one VT MT10543 Nh If there is only one sensor U21 the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CCT640 whatever the phase Characteristics Fs set point Setting 45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Accuracy 1 0 1 Hz Pick up drop out difference 0 2 Hz 0 1 Hz Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times 1 Operation time pick up lt 100 ms typically 80 ms Overshoot time lt 100 ms Reset time lt 100 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s 3 32 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection f
109. age English m CT rating 5A m number of CTs 3 11 12 13 m rated current In 680 A m basic current Ib 630 A m integration period 5 mn m residual current 31 sum m pre trig for disturbance recording 36 periods Protection functions m all the protections are off m the settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general characteristics by default in particular rated current In m tripping behavior O latching yes O activation of output O1 yes O disturbance recording triggering with Control matrix Each Sepam has program logic by default according to the type S20 T20 as well as messages for the different signal lamps The functions are assigned according to the most frequent use of the unit This parameter setting may be customized if required using the SFT2841 software package S20 application activation of output O2 upon protection tripping activation of indicators according to front panel markings watchdog on output 04 disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick up complements for T20 application activation of O1 without latching upon tripping of temperature monitoring 1 to 7 activation of O1 and indicator L9 without latching upon thermal overload tripping complements for M20 application activation of outputs O1 and O2 and indicator L9 upon tripping of functions 37 phase undercurrent and 51LR locked rotor O activation of output O2 upon tripping of
110. agnosis screen m enter them in the test sheet J Merlin Gerin 7 23 Commissioning 7 24 Checking of parameter and protection settings Determination of parameter and protection settings All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined ahead of time by the design department in charge of the application and should be approved by the customer It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary or even consolidated by a network coordination study All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings should be available at the time of commissioning m in paper file format with the SFT2841 software the parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam may be printed directly or exported in a text file for editing m and when applicable in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using the SFT2841 software Checking of parameters and protection settings Check to be made when the Sepam parameter and protection settings have not been entered or downloaded during commissioning testing to confirm the conformity of the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the study The aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection settings m go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841 software in the order proposed in guided mode m for each screen compare the values entered in the Sepam w
111. ajor fault in Sepam m bit8 partial fault in Sepam m bit7 setting group A in service m bit6 setting group B in service m bit 3 0 mapping number 1 to 16 Other bits reserved undetermined values Status changes of bits 6 7 8 10 12 13 and 14 of this word trigger the transmission of a time tagged event Bits 3 to 0 encode a mapping number from 1 to 15 which is used to identify the contents of the Modbus addresses the assignment of which varies depending on the application 5 13 Modbus communication 5 14 Data addresses and encoding Use of remote annunciation Sepam provides the communication link with 64 remote annunciation bits TS The TS are pre assigned to protection and control functions which depend on the Sepam model The TS can be read using the bit or word functions Each TS transition is time tagged and stored in the event stack see section Time tagging of events Address word 0101 TS1 to TS16 bit address 1010 to 101F TS Use Protection 50 51 relay 1 group A Protection 50 51 relay 2 group A Protection 50 51 relay 1 group B Protection 50 51 relay 2 group B Protection 50N 51N relay 1 group A Protection 50N 51N relay 2 group A Protection 50N 51N relay 1 group B Protection 50N 51N relay 2 group B Protection 49 RMS alarm set point 10 Protection 49 RMS trip set point 11 Protection 37 12 Protection 46 13 Protection 48 51LR 14 locked rotor 14 Protection 48 51LR 14 rotor locking on
112. alance ANSI code 46 Determination of tripping time for IDMT tripping curve different negative sequence current t s values for a given curve E 0000 Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to the required negative sequence current The tripping 5000 time is equal to KT Example 2000 given a tripping curve with the setting T 0 5 s 1000 What is the tripping time at 0 6 Ib Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to 500 60 of Ib The table reads K 7 55 The tripping time is equal to 200 0 5 X7 55 3 7558 100 50 20 max curve T 1s 10 5 2 1 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 min curve T 0 1s 0 02 0 01 0 005 0 002 0 001 I Ib 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 2 5 7 10 20 li Ib 10 15 20 25 30 33 33 35 40 45 50 55 57 7 60 65 70 75 K 99 95 5450 3544 25 38 19 32 16 51 15 34 12 56 10 53 9 00 8 21 7 84 7 55 7 00 6 52 6 11 li Ib contd 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 K cont d 5 74 5 42 5 13 4 87 4 64 4 24 3 90 3 61 3 37 3 15 2 96 2 80 2 65 2 52 2 40 2 29 li Ib cont d 22 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 K con d 2 14 2 10 2 01 1 94 1 86 1 80 1 74 1 68 1 627
113. ange 0 to 300s Unit s or ms Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical Starting overload current Measurement range 1 2 Ib to 24 In Unit Aor kA Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Or 65 5 kA J Merlin Gerin 2 13 Machine operation assistance functions 2 14 Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay Number of starts before inhibition Operation The number of starts allowed before inhbition is calculated by the number of starts protection function The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero The number of starts counters may be reset to zero as follows after the entry of a password m on the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m on the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 60 Unit none Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Start inhibit time delay Operation The time delay is calculated by the number of starts protection function If the number of starts protection function indicates that starting is inhibited the time given repres
114. aximum number of relays available in the Sepam It may never be equal to 0 Exception reply In addition to the usual cases Sepam can send type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if m another remote reading or setting request is being processed m the remote setting function is inhibited PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 5 23 Modbus communication Access to remote settings Reply frame The reply sent back by the Sepam is the same as the remote reading reply frame It fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125 words at the address 2000h and is composed of the effective settings of the function following a semantic check 2000h 207Ch special field for each function This zone is read by a read n words operation function 3 at the address 2000h The length of the exchange may unclude m the first word only validity test m the maximum size of the reply zone 125 words m the usable size of the reply zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the address zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The first word in the reply zone function code and relay number has the same values as those described for the remote reading reply frame m xxyy with O function code xx different from 00 and FFh O relay number yy different from FFh The settings are available and validated The word is a copy of the request frame T
115. ay the appearance of a signal by a time T T 0 i S x lt DE50679 T ____ m off delay timer used to delay the disappearance of a signal by a time T 0 T i S x lt DE50680 T __ PCRED301005EN June 2005 Definition of symbols Pulse mode operation m on pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal appears DE50681 x lt ie m off pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal disappears DE50682 x lt x lt ____ Note the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure Bistable functions Bistable functions may be used to store values DE50683 s n Ge oO Equation B S R xB f Merlin Gerin 4 3 Control and monitoring Assignment of logic functions inputs outputs The use of the preset control and monitoring functions requires exclusive parameter setting and particular wiring of the inputs according to their application and the type of Sepam The advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software may be used to assign inputs and set the control and monitoring function parameters Since an input may only be assigned to a single function not all the functions are available at the same time Example if the logic discrimination function is used the switching of groups of settings function may not be used Assignment by application chart Logic inputs Open position 111 112 113 Close
116. ays may be carried out by Sepam using the predefined Circuit breaker contactor control function with latching of all tripping conditions protection function outputs and logic inputs With this function Sepam performs the following m grouping of all tripping conditions and breaking device control m latching of the tripping order with inhibition of closing until the cause of tripping disappears and is acknowledged by the user see Latching acknowledgment m indication of the cause of tripping O locally by signal lamps Trip and others and by messages on the display O remotely by remote indications J Merlin Gerin 4 5 DE52224 DE50374 Control and monitoring Circuit breaker contactor control functions ANSI code 94 69 Block diagram Sepam 20 T20 or M20 26 inhibition F49 inhibit start thermal overload protection 66 125 pressure drop SF6 1 starts per hour z1 z 126 pressure drop SF6 2 T 200 ms trip circuit fault 02 inhibit closing wW protection functions valided for 2 tripping overcurrent 121 external tripping 1 122 external tripping 2 123 external tripping 3 114 external tripping 4 121 Buchholz tripping z gt 1 123 Pressure tripping 2 122 Thermostat tripping TC1 open order 123 Thermistor tripping 126 inhibition F49 a thermal overload 49 tripping D open order by recloser g O1 tripping shunt undervoltage Tee cee Ordet
117. ble current 20kA 1s on the primary winding of a MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 50 that does not saturate Operating temperature 5 C to 55 C Storage temperature 25 C to 70 C Description and dimensions E ACE990 input terminal block for connection of the core balance CT S ACE990 output terminal block for connection of the Sepam residual current input s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE51682 Installation Example Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1 400 2 VA used within a measurement range of 0 5 A to 60 A How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990 1 2 3 Choose a close approximation of the rated current InO i e 5A Calculate the ratio approx In0 number of turns 5 400 0 0125 Find the closest value of k in the table opposite k 0 01136 Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT 2 VA core balance CT gt 0 1 VA OK Connect the core balance secondary to ACE990 input terminals E2 and E4 Set Sepam up with In0 0 0136 x 400 4 5 A This value of In0 may be used to monitor current between 0 45 A and 67 5 A Wiring of MV core balance secondary circuit m MV core balance CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal m MV core balance CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal PCRED301005EN June 2005 ACE990 Core balance CT interface Terminals connection Connection of core balance CT Only one core balance CT may be con
118. ce lt 600 Q wiring included Accuracy 0 50 1 According to configuration 2 Relay outputs comply with clause 6 7 of standard C37 90 30 A 200 ms 2000 operations 1 4 s O PCRED301005EN June 2005 Sepam series 20 Environmental characteristics Emission tests Disturbing field emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 A Conducted disturbance emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 B Immunity tests Radiated disturbances Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255 22 3 10 V m 80 MHz 1 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 1 III 10 V m 80 MHz 2 GHz ANSI C37 90 2 0 35 V m 25 MHz 1 GHz Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255 22 2 8 kV air 6 kV contact ANSI C37 90 3 8 kV air 4 kV contact Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency IEC 61000 4 8 IV 30 A m continuous 300 A m 13 s Immunity tests Conducted disturbances Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255 22 6 10 V Fast transient bursts IEC 60255 22 4 AorB 4 kV 2 5 kHz 2 kV 5 kHz IEC 61000 4 4 IV 4 kV 2 5 kHz ANSI C37 90 1 4 kV 2 5 kHz 1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255 22 1 II 2 5kV MC 1 kV MD ANSI C37 90 1 2 5 kV MC and MD 100 kHz damped oscillating wave IEC 61000 4 12 2 5 kV MC 1 kV MD Surges IEC 61000 4 5 HII 2 kV MC 1 kV MD Voltage interruptions IEC 60255 11 Series 20 100 10 ms Series 40 100 20 ms In operation Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 1 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Fe 2 Hz 13 2 Hz a 1mm Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 10 Gn 11 ms Earthquake
119. choice of ___ 0 9 m press the key to confirm the choice and go on to the following digit The values are entered with 3 significant digits and a period The unit e g A or kA is chosen using the last digit m press the key to confirm the entry then press the key for access to the following field m all of the values entered are only effective after the user confirms by selecting the box at the bottom of the screen and presses the key s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use The Sepam units are delivered with default parameter setting and protection setting according to the type of application These factory settings are also used with the SFT2841 software m for the creation of new files in not connected mode m for a return to the factory settings in connected mode PCRED301005EN June 2005 Default parameter setting 20 T20 and M20 applications Hardware configuration m identification Sepam xxxx m model UX m MES module absent m MET module absent m MSA module absent m DSM module present m ACE module absent Output parameter setting m outputs used O1 to 04 m shunt trip units 01 O3 m undervoltage trip units 02 04 E impulse mode no latched Program logic m circuit breaker control no m logic discrimination no m logic input assignment not used General characteristics m network frequency 50 Hz m group of settings A m enable remote setting no m working langu
120. connected powered and set up correctly m for a fiber optic ring check that the Modbus master can handle the echo of its requests correctly In all cases m check all the ACE configuration parameters on SFT2841 m check the CPT2 and CPT9 diagnostic counters on the SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen J Merlin Gerin 5 7 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Presentation Data which are similar from the monitoring and control application viewpoint are grouped together in adjacent address zones Synchronization zone 0002 0005 3 16 Identification zone 0006 OOOF 3 First event table Exchange word 0040 0040 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0041 0060 3 Second event table Exchange word 0070 0070 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0071 0090 3 Data States 0100 0105 3 4 1 2 Measurements 0106 0131 3 4 Remote control orders 01F0 01F0 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Remote control confirmation 01F1 01F1 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Test zone OCOO OCOF 3 4 6 16 1y 2 5 15 Protection settings Reading 2000 207C 3 Reading request 2080 2080 3 6 16 Remote settings 2100 217C 3 6 Disturbance recording Choice of transfer function 2200 2203 3 16 Identification zone 2204 2228 3 Fault rec exchange word 2300 2300 3 6 16 Fault rec data 2301 237C 3 Application Configuration FCOO FCO2 3 Application identification FC10 FC22 3 N B Non addressable zones may reply by an exception message or else supply non significant data these zones may be acces
121. ction is inverse when the positive sequence voltage is less than 10 of Unp and when the phase to phase voltage is greater than 80 of Unp Vd lt Vsd Vd lt 0 1Un U gt 0 8 Un Characteristics Vsd set point Block diagram Vd time delayed output MT10872 pick up signal U21 rotation display or V1 Setting 15 Unp to 60 Unp Accuracy 2 Pick up drop out ratio 103 42 5 Resolution 1 Time delay Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristics times Operating time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 35 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Displays rotation instead of positive sequence voltage measurement PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 5 Protection functions Remanent undervoltage ANSI code 27R Operation This protection is single phase m it picks up when the U21 phase to phase voltage is less than the Us set point m the protection includes a definite time delay Block diagram U21 or V1 time delayed output MT10875 pick up signal Characteristics Us set point Setting 5 Unp to 100 Unp Accuracy 2 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 42 5 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time lt 40 ms Overshoot time lt 20 ms Reset time lt 30 ms
122. current injection values change To test current inputs connected to LPCT sensors with a standard injection box the ACE917 injection adapter is required The ACE917 adapter is inserted between m the standard injection box m the LPCT test plug O integrated in the Sepam CCA670 connector O or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The ACE917 injection adapter should be set according to the currents selected on the CCA670 connector the ACE917 setting should be equal to the number of the microswitch that is set to 1 on the CCA670 The injection value depends on the rated primary current selected on the CCA670 connector and entered in the Sepam general settings i e m 1 A for the following values in Amps 25 50 100 133 200 320 400 630 m 5A for the following values in Amps 125 250 500 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 Block diagram without CCA613 accessory Sepam 20 T20 M20 12345678 1 e 0 ACE917 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8 Input Current generator fq Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE52245 Checking of residual current input connection Description Check to be carried out for Sepam S20 T20 or M20 when the residual current is measured by a specific sensor m CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT m another core balance CT connected to an ACE990 interface m a single 1 Aor5ACT encompassing the 3 phases connected to a CSH30 interposing ring
123. currents use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to the CT rated primary current m if the residual current is measured via 3 phase CTs connected to a CSH30 interposing ring CT use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to the CT rated primary current m turn off the generator m proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase current inputs E at the end of the test put the cover back on the test terminal box PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 25 Commissioning Description Check to be performed for Sepam S20 T20 or M20 when phase currents are measured by LPCT type current sensors Phase current measurement by LPCT sensors m The 3LPCT current sensors are connected via an RJ45 plug to the CCA670 connector which is to be mounted on the rear panel of Sepam identified as m The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into the fail safe position m The rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors is to be entered as a Sepam general setting and configured by microswitches on the CCA670 connector 7 26 Checking of phase current input connection LPCT type current sensors Procedure The tests to be carried out to check phase current input connections are the same whether the phase currents are measured by CTs or LPCT sensors Only the Sepam current input connection procedure and
124. cy 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical switching threshold 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC Input limit voltage At state 1 gt 19V DC gt 88 V DC 2 88 V AC 2176V DC 2176V AC At state 0 lt 6 VDC lt 75 VDC lt 22V AC lt 137 VDC lt 48 V AC Control relay outputs 01 O2 O11 contacts 2 Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive load 8 4A 0 7 A 0 3 A L R load lt 20 ms 6 2A 0 5A 0 2A L R load lt 40 ms 4 1A 0 2A 0 1A Resistive load 8A p f load gt 0 3 5A Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Annunciation relay output 03 04 012 013 O14 contacts Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity L R load lt 20 ms 2 1A 0 5A 0 15A p p f load gt 0 3 EB Voltage OOO ABOVDO CO SOCSCSCSCSC NOLAAOV AC hh Range 20 10 20 10 47 5 to 63 Hz Deactivated consumption lt 4 5W lt 9VA Maximum consumption lt 8W lt 15VA Inrush current lt 10 A for 10 ms lt 28 A for 100 ms lt 28 A for 100 ms lt 15 A for first half Inrush current OO lt TOAfor 10 ms lt 28 Afor100ms lt 28 A for 100 ms lt 15 A for first half period Acceptable momentary outages 10 ms 20 ms Analog output MSA141 module Current 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Load impedan
125. d from the value of the current m running if gt 0 1 Ib m stopped if lt 0 1 Ib Two time constants may be set m 1 heat rise time constant concerns equipment that is running m T2 cooling time constant concerns equipment that is stopped Accounting for harmonics The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3 phase current which takes into account harmonics up to number 17 Accounting for ambient temperature Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 40 C The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor option to increase the calculated heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 40 C Tmax 40 C Increase factor faz SA Tmax Tambient in which T max is the equipments maximum temperature according to insulation class T ambient is the measured temperature 1 MET148 2 module RTC 8 predefined for ambient temperature measurement Adaptation of the protection to motor thermal withstand Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by the machine manufacturer To fully comply with these experimental curves additional parameters must be set m initial heat rise EsO is used to reduce the cold tripping time 2 2a Eso b modified cold curve i ane 29 Es Ib m a second group of parameters time constants and set points is used to ta
126. d if the input is set to O NEG prefix The device tripping and closing and recloser enable and disable remote control orders are acknowledged if the CB control function is validated and if the inputs necessary for the logic are present on the MES114 or MES108 optional module Direct remote control order The remote control order is executed when it is written in the remote control word The program logic resets it to zero after the remote control order is acknowledged Confirmed SBO remote control order Select Before Operate In this mode remote control orders involve two steps m selection by the master of the order to be sent by writing of the bit in the STC word and checking of the selection by rereading the word m execution of the order to be sent by writing of the bit in the TC word The remote control order is executed if the bit in the STC word and the bit in the associated word are set the program logic resets the bit STC and TC bits to zero after the remote control order is acknowledged Deselection of the STC bit takes place m if the master deselects it by writing in the STC word m if the master selects write bit a bit other than the one already selected m if the master sets a bit in the TC word which does not match the selection In this case no remote control order is executed 5 16 Data addresses and encoding Address word 01F0 TC1 to TC16 address bit 1F00 to 1FOF TC CO N amp OW BI
127. d o 2 Vsd set point Unp 3 Tripping time delay 10 ms 4to8 Reserved ANSI 27R Remanent undervoltage Function number 0901 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or disabled 1 2 Us set point Unp 3 Tripping time delay 10 ms 4to8 Reserved ANSI 27S Phase to neutral undervoltage Function number 1801 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or disabled 2 Vs set point Vnp 3 Tripping time delay 10 ms 4to8 Reserved ANSI 37 Phase undercurrent Function number 0501 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or disabled 1 2 Is set point Ib 3 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 38 49T Temperature monitoring Function number 15xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Relay 3 xx 03 Relay 4 xx 04 Relay 5 xx 05 Relay 6 xx 06 Relay 7 xx 07 Relay 8 xx 08 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Enabled or disabled 2 Alarm set point C 3 Trip set point C 4to8 Reserved 5 27 Modbus communication ANSI 46 Negative sequence unbalance Function number 0301 Setting Bl ow PM ANSI 48 51LR 14 Locked rotor excessive starting time Data Enable or disabled Tripping curve Is set point Tripping time delay Function number 0601 Setting Or B G P Data Enabled or disabled Is set point Excessive starting time delayB ST Locked rotor time delay LT Locked rotor on start time delay LTS ANSI 49RMS Thermal overload Function number 0401 Setting CO NIOJ AJOJ N gt co 10 11 12
128. d position Logic discrimination receive BL Switching of groups of settings A B External reset 114 External tripping 4 External tripping 1 121 External network synchronization External tripping 2 122 Motor reacceleration External tripping 3 123 Buchholz alarm Buchholz alarm message Rotor rotation detection Thermistor tripping End of charging position 124 Thermostat alarm thermostat alarm message Thermistor alarm Inhibit remote control 125 SF6 1 SF6 2 Change of thermal settings Inhibit thermal overload Inhibit recloser 126 Logic outputs Tripping Inhibit closing Watchdog Closing order O O O Ay PO O11 Note all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other non predefined applications ii Tt TTT a E E E a a E Zin E a ii T aa ii o TT TTI 1 These inputs have parameter setting with the prefix NEG for undervoltage type operation 2 Buchholz Gas trip message 3 Thermostat trip message 4 Pressure trip message 4 4 f Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Control and monitoring functions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 Description Sepam may be used to control breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils m circuit breaker with shut trip or undervoltage tripping coil parameter set on the
129. d to Sepam mode Sepam parameter and protection setting The parameter and protection setting of a Sepam using SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file containing all the characteristics that are specific to the application a file that is then downloaded into Sepam at the time of commissioning Operating mode m create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam to be set up the newly created file contains the Sepam factory set parameter and protection settings m modify the Sepam page function sheet parameters and the Protections page function sheet protection settings A guided mode may be used to go through all the function sheets to be modified in the natural order The screens may be sequenced in guided mode by means of the Previous screen and Next screen functions in the Options menu which are also available in the form of icons in the toolbar The screens function sheets are sequenced in the following order 1 Sepam configuration 2 Program logic 3 General characteristics 4 protection setting screens according to the type of Sepam 5 Control matrix Modification of function sheet contents m the parameter and protection setting input fields are suited to the type of value O choice buttons O numerical value input fields O dialogue box Combo box m the modifications made to a function sheet are to be Applied or Canceled before the user goes on to the following function sheet m the c
130. ddress 01F 1 STC16 16 15 14 Bit address 1F1x PCRED301005EN June 2005 61 Data addresses and encoding Data encoding For all formats If a measurement overruns the maximum permissible value for the related format the value read for the measurement will be the maximum permissible value for the format Format 16 NS All information is encoded in a 16 bit word in absolute value unsigned binary format The zero bit bO is the least significant bit in the word Format 16 S signed measurements temperatures The information is encoded in a 16 bit word as a complement of 2 Example m 0001 represents 1 m FFFF represents 1 Format B Ix Rank i bit in the word with i between 0 and F B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 26 25 24 23 22 21 14 13 12 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Format X Sepam check word This format applies only to the Sepam check word that may be accessed at the word address 100h This word contains various items of information relating to m Sepam operating mode m time tagging of events Each data item contained in the Sepam check word may be accessed bit by bit from address 1000 for the bit bO to 100F for the bit b15 m bit15 event present m bit14 Sepam in data loss status m bit 13 Sepam not synchronous m bit12 Sepam time not correct m biti1 reserved m bit10 Sepam in local setting mode m bit9 m
131. del d th lue K of time delay read the value Ts10 on the line for IA Is The operation time tA for the current IA General IDMT protection functions Example Data m type of time delay very inverse time VIT m set point Is m time delay T 0 8 s Question What is the operation time for the current IA 6 Is Reading of the table VIT column line i 6 Is Answer The operation time for the current IA is t 1 80 x 0 8 1 44 s with the Is and T settings is tA K T Table of values of K I Is SIT VIT LTI EIT UIT and IEC A and IEC B andIEC C 1 0 1 1 24 700 90 000 471 429 1 2 12 901 45 000 225 000 545 905 1 5 5 788 18 000 79 200 179 548 2 0 3 376 9 000 33 000 67 691 2 5 2 548 6 000 18 857 35 490 3 0 2 121 4 500 12 375 21 608 3 5 1 858 3 600 8 800 14 382 4 0 1 676 3 000 6 600 10 169 4 5 1 543 2 571 5 143 7 513 5 0 1 441 2 250 4 125 5 742 5 5 1 359 2 000 3 385 4 507 6 0 1 292 1 800 2 829 3 616 6 5 1 236 1 636 2 400 2 954 7 0 1 188 1 500 2 063 2 450 7 5 1 146 1 385 1 792 2 060 8 0 1 110 1 286 1 571 1 751 8 5 1 078 1 200 1 390 1 504 9 0 1 049 1 125 1 238 1 303 9 5 1 023 1 059 1 109 1 137 10 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 10 5 0 979 0 947 0 906 0 885 11 0 0 959 0 900 0 825 0 787 11 5 0 941 0 857 0 754 0 704 12 0 0 925 0 818 0 692 0 633 12 5 0 910 0 783 0 638 0 572 13 0 0 895 0 750 0 589 0 518 13 5 0 882 0 720 0 546 0 471 14 0 0 870 0 692 0 508 0 430 14 5 0 858 0 667 0 473 0 394 15 0
132. dern SFT2841 Net Configuration of a Sepam network is in 2 parts m configuration of the communication network m configuration of the Sepam units Configuration of the communication network To configure the communication network first define m the type of link between the PC and the Sepam network m the communication parameters according to the type of link selected O direct serial link O link via Ethernet TCP IP O link via telephone modem Heel oer 2s PE50603 Configuration windows for the communication network according to the type of link direct serial link link via telephone modem PSTN or link via Ethernet TCP IP PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 7 Use SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Direct serial link The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 or fiber optic multidrop network Depending on the serial link interfaces available on the PC the PC itself will be connected either directly to the RS 485 network or fiber optic HUB or via an RS 232 RS 485 converter or fiber optic converter PE50588 The communication parameters to be defined are port communication port used on the PC speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds parity None Even or Odd handshake None RTS or RTS CTS time out from 100 to 3000 ms number of retries from 1 to 6 Configuration window for the serial link communication network Link via TCP IP Ethernet The Sepam un
133. e Latching acknowledgment function associated with the Circuit breaker contactor control function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 lockout relay function RESET key acknowledgment TC5 reset inhibit remote control 125 external reset 114 TC circuit breaker position discrepancy This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control order received and the actual position of the circuit breaker a control The information is accessible via remote indication TS42 position discrepancy Trip circuit supervision and open closed matching Description This supervision is designed for trip circuits m with shunt trip units The function detects O circuit continuity O loss of supply O mismatching of position contacts The function inhibits closing of the breaking device m with undervoltage trip units The function detects mismatching of position contacts coil supervision being unnecessary in this case The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication T843 Block diagram 111 DE52238 112 trip circuit fault Wiring for undervoltage trip unit 1 With MES option The function is activated if inputs 111 and 112 are set respectively as circuit breaker open position and circuit breaker closed position Open and close order supervision Following a circuit breaker open or close order the system checks whether after a 2 seconds time delay
134. e The tripping time for l0 IsO values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve elements divided into two groups of 2 settings called Group A and Group B respectively chosen The use of the two elements may be chosen by parameter setting Name of curve Type m operation with Group A or Group B exclusively with Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 switching from one group to the other dependentonthe Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 state of logic input 113 exclusively or by remote control Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 TC3 TC4 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 113 0 group A RI curve 1 113 1 group B IEC standard inverse time SIT A 1 m operation with Group A and Group B active for 4 set IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B 1 point operation IEC extremely inverse time EIT C 1 m enabling disabling of each group of 2 elements IEEE moderately inverse IEC D 1 A B IEEE very inverse IEC E 1 Operation IEEE extremely inverse IEC F 1 ee IAC inverse 1 The earth fault protection function is single pole It picks up if the earth fault current reaches the AO eB IES IAC extremely inverse 1 operation set point It is time delayed The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves opposite The protection function includes harmonic 2 restraint The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval which provides greater stability when transformers are For currents with a
135. e for 10 Is These 3 settings are made chronologically in the following order type Is current time delay T Changing the time delay T setting by x changes all of the operation times in the curve by x Examples of problems to be solved Problem 1 Knowing the type of IDMT determine the Is current and time delay T settings Theoretically the current setting Is corresponds to the maximum current that may be permanent it is generally the rated current of the protected equipment cable transformer The time delay T is set to the operation point at 10 Is on the curve This setting is determined taking into account the constraints involved in discrimination with the upstream and downstream protection devices The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of point A on the operation curve IA tA e g the point that corresponds to the maximum fault current affecting the downstream protection device Problem 2 Knowing the type of IDMT the current setting Is anda point k Ik tk on the operation curve determine the time delay setting T On the standard curve of the same type read the operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative current Ik Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current 10 Is 3 34 General IDMT protection functions The time delay setting that should be made in order for the operation curve to pass through the point k Ik tk is tk T Ts1
136. e as the Sepam and master communication settings Characteristics Weight 0 280 kg Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Power supply 110 to 220 V AC 10 47 to 63 Hz Galvanic isolation 2000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min between power supply and frame and between power supply and interface supply Galvanic isolation 1000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating Data format 11 bits 1 start 8 bits 1 parity 1 stop Transmission delay lt 100 ns distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces 12 V DC or 24 V DC Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12 distributed supply Operating temperature 5 C to 55 C 5 ns fast transient bursts 60255 22 4 4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255 22 1 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 1 2 50 us impulse wave 60255 5 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter Description and dimensions A Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS 485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block DE51667 1 Distributed
137. e bytes Exchange number in the data zone Data zone Reading should always begin with the first word in the address zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The configuration and data files are read in their entirety in Sepam They are transferred adjacently 5 31 Modbus communication 5 32 Disturbance recording If the master requests more exchanges than necessary the exchange number remains unchanged and the number of usable bytes is forced to 0 To guarantee the data transfers it is necessary to allow a response time of about 500 ms between each reading operation at 2300h The first word transmitted is an exchange word The exchange word comprises two fields m the most significant byte contains the exchange number It is incremented by 1 by the Sepam each time a successful transfer takes place When it reaches the value FFh it automatically goes back to zero m the least significant byte contains the number of usable bytes in the data zone It is initialized to zero after energizing and must be different from FFh The exchange word may also have the following values m xxyy the number of usable bytes in the data zone yy must be different from FFh m 0000h no read requeste frame has been formulated yet as it is the case in particular when the Sepam is switched on The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone ar
138. e logic status of inputs outputs and signal lamps This software is the solution suited to occasional local operation for demanding personnel who require fast access to all the information Parameter and protection setting 1 Example of a measurement display screen Sepam M20 m display and setting of all the parameters of each protection function in the same page m program logic parameter setting parameter setting of general installation and Sepam data E input data may be prepared ahead of time and transferred into the corresponding Sepam units ina single operation downloading function PE10052 Main functions performed by SFT2841 m changing of passwords m entry of general characteristics ratings integration period m setting Sepam date and time m entry of protection settings m changing of program logic assignments m enabling disabling of functions m saving of files Saving m protection and parameter setting data may be saved m printing of reports is possible as well This software may also be used to recover disturbance recording files and provide graphic display using the SFT2826 software tool Operating assistance l l Example of a phase overcurrent protection setting screen Access from all the screens to a help section which contains all the technical data required for Sepam installation and use 1 Modes accessed via 2 passwords protection setting level parameter setting leve
139. e not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant The words which follow the exchange word make up the data zone Since the configuration and data files are adjacent a frame may contain the end of the configuration file and the beginning of the data file of a record It is up to the remote monitoring and control system software to reconstruct the files in accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files indicated in the identification zone Acknowledging a transfer To inform the Sepam that a record block that it has just read has been received correctly the master must write the number of the last exchange that it has carried out in the exchange number filed and set the number of usable bytes in the data zone of the exchange word to zero The Sepam only increments the exchange number if new acquisition bursts are present Rereading the identification zone To ensure that the record has not been modified during its transfer by a new record the master rereads the contents of the identification zone and ensures that the recovered record date is still present s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Reading Sepam identification Presentation The Read Device Identification function is used to access in a standardized manner the information required to clearly identify a device The description is made up of a set of object
140. ed to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software General Characteristics tab Rated phase current 2or3CT1A 5A 1 Ato 6250 A sensor primary current 3LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A Base current according to rated power of equipment 0 4 to 1 3 In Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents See In rated phase current CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 2 A or 20 A rating 1 A 5 A CT CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A to 6250 A Core balance CT ACE990 the core According to current monitored balance CT ratio and use of ACE990 1 n must be such that 50 lt n lt 1500 Rated primary phase to phase voltage 220 V to 250 kV Vnp rated primary phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp Vv3 Rated secondary phase to phase voltage 3 VTs V1 V2 V3 100 110 115 120 200 230 V 2 VTs U21 U32 100 110 115 120 V 1 VT V1 100 110 115 120 V Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero Uns 3 or Uns 3 sequence voltage Unp V3 Rated frequency S02 0 60H Integration period for demand current and peak 5 10 15 30 60 mn demand current and power 1 In values for LPCT in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 2 2 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Metering functions Characteristics Metering Phase current 0 1 to 40 In 1 E Residual current Calculated ottoon faa Cs Measured SE C D
141. emand current ottoaoin fas O o Peak demand current otoan ja o Phase to phase voltage oo5w12U0p as W Phase to neutral voltage oost12vy as o Residual voltage oo5t3v Jas J Positive sequence voltage 0 05t012vnp fsa J Frequency Sepam series 20 50s5Hzor60s5Hz z005 w Temperature 30 to 200 C 1 C from 20 to 140 C m or 22 to 392 F Network diagnosis assistance Phase tripping current 0 1 to 40 In 5 o Earth fault tripping current 0 1 to 20 InO 5 Oo Negative sequence unbalance 10 to 500 of Ib 2 Disturbance recording Machine operating assistance O i pe Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 1 E Oo 100 for phase Ib Remaining operating time before overload tripping oto99mm isi i s lt wi a Waiting time after overload tripping owm etm Running hours counter operating time oto 6ssa5hours sat ors05h Jo Starting current 5 ie Starting time owsos feom p Number of starts before inhibition owo R o o o Start inhibit time 0 to 360 mn 1 mn Switchgear diagnosis assistance Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA 10 Oo Number of operations owa pooo O o Operating time 20t0100ms tims O Charging time 2055 fo m available on MSA141 analog output module according to setup o saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage 1 Typical accuracy see details on subsequent pages 2 Measurement up to 0 02 In for informa
142. en by the device connected to the analog output s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning Project Switchboard Cubicle Test sheet sepam series 20 Type of Sepam ILL J EL JL LL i VL LL Serial number Software version Type of check Preliminary general examination prior to energizing Energizing Parameter and protection settings Logic input connection Logic output connection Validation of the complete protection chain Analog output connection to the MSA141 module Temperature sensor input connection to the MET148 2 module for type T20 or M20 O O O O O O 0O 0 Type of check Phase current input connection Residual current value obtained by 3 phase CTs Residual current input connection to a specific sensor mg CSH120 or CSH200 E other core balance CT ACE990 m 1xi1Aor5ACT CSH30 Type of check Phase voltage input connection Residual voltage value obtained by 3 phase VTs Connection of residual voltage input Tests performed on By Comments PCRED301005EN June 2005 Test performed Secondary injection of CT rated current i e 1 Aor5A Secondary injection of CT rated current i e 1 Aor5A Injection of 5 A into primary circuit of core balance CT or CT Test performed Secondary injection of VT rated phase to neutral voltage Uns V3 Secondary injection of VT rated phase to neutral voltage Uns V3 Secondary injection of voltage U
143. en of the SFT2841 software tool Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage V AC setting inhibits the operating time measurement function Assembly m insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit m flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2 m tighten the 3 mounting screws Connection Dangerous voltages may be present on the terminal screws whether the terminals are used or not To avoid all danger of electrical shock tighten all terminal screws so that they cannot be touched inadvertently The inputs are potential free and the DC power supply source is external Wiring of connectors M and kK m wiring without fitting O 1 wire with maximum cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 O or 2 wires with maximum cross section 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 O stripped length 8 to 10 mm m wiring with fittings O recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for one 1 5 mm wire DZ5CE025D for one 2 5 mm wire AZ5DE010D for two 1 mm wires O tube length 8 2 mm O stripped length 8 mm PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE50566 Installation Optional remote modules Connection The optional MET148 2 MSA141 or DSM303 modules are connected to the base unit connector D by a series of links using prefabricated cords which come in 3 different lengths with black fittings m CCA770 L 0 6 m m CCA772 L 2 m m CCA774 L 4m The DSM303 mod
144. ents the waiting time before starting is allowed Readout The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 360 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh interval 1 second typical CEM PCRED301005EN June 2005 Switchgear diagnosis functions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Cumulative breaking current and number of operations Cumulative breaking current Operation This function indicates the cumulative breaking current in square kiloamperes kA for five current ranges It is based on measurement of the fundamental component The current ranges displayed are m O lt l lt 2In m 2in lt l lt 5In m 5In lt l lt 10lIn m 10In lt I lt 40In m gt 40In The function also provides the total number of operations and the cumulative total of breaking current in kA Each value is saved in the event of a power failure Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information Number of operation The function is activated by tripping commands O1 relay This value is saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link
145. er equipment PC with minimal configuration Microsoft Windows 98 XP 2000 NT 4 0 133 MHz Pentium processor 64 MB of RAM or 32 MB with Windows 98 64 MB free on hard disk CD ROM drive m SFT2841 software m CCA 783 serial connection cord between the PC and Sepam OOddadgdOo E Documents m complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules with O phase current input connection to the corresponding CTs via the test terminal box O residual current input connection O phase voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box O residual voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box O logic input and output connection O temperature sensor connection O analog output connection m hardware BOMs and installation rules m group of Sepam parameter and protection settings available in paper format s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning PCRED301005EN June 2005 General examination and preliminary actions Checking to be done prior to energizing Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment use the diagrams and BOMs provided by the contractor to check m identification of Sepam and accessories determined by the contractor m correct earthing of Sepam via terminal 17 of the 20 pin connector m conformity of Sepam auxiliary voltage indicated on the label stuck to the right side plate of the base unitbase unit with the auxiliary supply volta
146. ers for the modem s RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Telephone network interface Modern modems offer sophisticated features such as checking the quality of the telephone line error correction and data compression These options are not justified for communication between SFT2841 and Sepam which is based on the Modbus RTU protocol Their effect on communication performance may be the opposite of the expected result It is therefore highly advisable to m invalidate the error correction data compression and telephone line quality monitoring options m use the same end to end communication speed between O the Sepam network and the called modem O the called modem Sepam side and the calling modem PC side O the PC and the calling modem see recommended configurations table Sepam network Telephone network PC modem interface 38400 bauds V34 modulation 33600 bauds 38400 bauds 19200 bauds V34 modulation 19200 bauds 19200 bauds 9600 bauds V32 modulation 9600 bauds 9600 bauds Industrial configuration profile The following table shows the main characteristics of the modem on the Sepam side These characteristics match a configuration profile commonly known as an industrial profile as against the configuration of modems used in offices Depending o
147. esidual current I0 input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m to residual current I0 input on connector E terminals 15 and 14 shielding m to residual current l O input on connector E terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cable m sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m minimum cable cross section 0 93 mm AWG 18 max 2 5 mm m resistance per unit length lt 100 mQ m m minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms It is essential for the CSH30 to be installed near Sepam Sepam CSH30 link less than 2 meters long Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not be more than 4 Q 1 ACT 2 turns 5 ACT 4 turns PCRED301005EN June 2005 ef Merlin Gerin 6 15 PE50037 DE51681 Installation ACE990 core balance CT interface E1E2E3E4E5 MERLIN GERIN S1 S2 acesso 25 72 6 16 ACE990 Core balance CT interface Function The ACE990 interface is used to adapt measurements between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input Characteristics Weight 0 64 kg Assembly Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail Amplitude accuracy 1 Phase accuracy lt 2 Maximum permissi
148. ess m transmission speed m parity check type Parameters Authorized values Default value Sepam address 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds 38400 bauds Parity None Even or Odd Odd Configuration tips m The Sepam address MUST be assigned before Sepam is connected to the communication network m You are also strongly advised to set the other physical layer configuration parameters before making the connection to the communication network m Modifying the configuration parameters during normal operation will not disturb Sepam but will reset the communication port J Merlin Gerin 5 5 PE50587 Modbus communication i i lt a Jaj Jaj ell aj ale Pom eal Perra a an a oo eee Protocole Ge commune obon Tiree een niece vere Eva Tian kins Hi arib i Ts Himba ai ATAL Ha th L SFT2841 Sepam series 20 diagnosis screen 5 6 Commissioning and diagnosis Installing the communication network Preliminary study The communication network must first be the subject of a technical study to determine the following according to the installation characteristics and constraints geography amount of information processed etc m the type of medium electrical or fiber optic m the number of Sepam units per network m the transmission speed m the ACE interfaces configuration m the Sepam parameter settings Sepam user manual The communication interfaces
149. ess maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm Connection of analog output to screw type connector m 1 wire with cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 m or 2 wires with cross section 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 Wiring precautions m it is preferable to use shielded cables m use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end J Merlin Gerin 6 23 PE50127 DE51652 MT10151 Installation DSM303 remote advanced UMI module N N 01 2 8 9 11 165A ams I2 166A rms 13 167A rms RA 152 ___ __ gt Green LED Sepam on Red LED steadily on module unavailable flashing Sepam link unavailable 9 yellow indication LEDs Label identifying the indication LEDs Graphical LCD screen Display of measurements Display of switchgear network and machine diagnosis data Display of alarm messages Sepam reset or confirm data entry 10 Alarm acknowledement and clearing Or move cursor up 11 LED test or move cursor down 12 Access to protection settings 13 Access to Sepam parameters 14 Entry of 2 passwords 15 PC connection port DSM303 6 24 DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Function When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user machine interface the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI It may be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable
150. f Sepam In this case it must be sent regularly at brief intervals between 10 and 60 seconds in order for synchronous time to be obtained Sepam s internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received and synchronization is maintained if the difference in synchronism is less than 100 milliseconds With internal synchronization via the network accuracy is linked to the master and its mastery of time frame transmission in the communication network Sepam is synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame Time changes are made by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time Sepam then switches into a transitional non synchronous status When Sepam is in synchronous status if no time message is received for 200 seconds the appearance of the not synchronous event is triggered PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE50338 Modbus communication master computer MERLIN GERIN TL synchronization link network MERLIN GERIN Architecture for external synchronization via a logic input PCRED301005EN June 2005 Time tagging of events Synchronization con d External synchronization via a logic input mode Sepam can be synchronized externally by means of a logic input 121 the MES114 module is required The synchronisation pulse is determined by the rising edge of the logic input Sepam can adapt to all synchronization pulse periods f
151. fault the wording of the messages may be changed please consult us 2 RTD fault message refer to the maintenance chapter 3 According to parameter setting of the logic inputs 121 to 124 T20 type PCRED301005EN June 2005 f Merin Gerin P5 DE51148 Control and monitoring functions b51 I gt gt 5i b gt 5iN lo gt gt SIN ext 0 off lon Trip 2001 10 06 12 40 50 DEFAUT PHASE 1A Trip 11 162A Trip 12 161A Trip I3 250A Alarm message on the advanced UMI 4 12 Indications ANSI code 30 Message processing on the advanced UMI display When an event occurs the related message appears on the advanced UMI display The user presses the key to clear the message and be able to consult all the advanced UMI screens in the normal fashion The user must press the outputs The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history ZB key in which the last 64 messages are stored To delete the messages stored in the alarm history m display the alarm history on the advanced UMI m press the key way key to acknowledge latched events e g protection Signal lamp type indication The 9 yellow signal lamps on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following events Signal Event Label on lamp front panel LED 1 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 1 I gt 51 LED 2 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 2 I gt gt 51 LED 3 Tripping of protection 50N 51N unit 1 lo gt 51N LED 4 Tripping of protecti
152. g of N words starting at the address 2204h m 2 reserve words forced to 0 m size of record configuration files encoded in 1 word m size of record data files encoded in 1 words m number of records encoded in 1 word m date of record most recent encoded in 4 words see format below m date of record least recent encoded in 4 words see format below m 24 reserve words All of these data are consecutive Reading the contents of the different files Request frame The master makes the request by writing the date of the record to be transferred function 16 in 4 words starting at the address 2200h It should be noted that requesting a new record amounts to stopping the transfers which are in progress This is not the case for an identification zone transfer request 2200h O O O O O O O O Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y O O O O M M M M O O O D D D D D O O O H H H H H O O mn mn mn mn mn mn ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms MS ms ms ms Y 1 byte for years varies from O to 99 years The master must ensure that the year 00 is later than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 Reply frame Reading of each portion of configuration and data file records by a reading frame function 3 of 125 words starting at the address 2300h 2300h Number of usabl
153. ge of the switchboard or cubicle m correct connection of the auxiliary voltage terminal 1 AC or positive polarity terminal 2 AC or negative polarity m presence of a residual current measurement core balance CT and or additional modules connected to Sepam when applicable m presence of test terminal boxes upstream from the current inputs and voltage inputs m conformity of connections between Sepam terminals and the test terminal boxes Connections Check that the connections are tightened with equipment non energized The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in and locked Energizing Switch on the auxiliary power supply Check that Sepam performs the following initialization sequence which lasts approximately 6 seconds m green ON and red amp indicators on m red amp indicator off m pick up of watchdog contact The first screen displayed is the phase current or phase voltage metering screen according to the application Implementation of the SFT2841 software for PC m start up the PC m connect the PC RS 232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam using the CCA783 cord m start up the SFT2841 software by clicking on the related icon m choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked Identification of Sepam m note the Sepam serial number given on the label stuck to the right side plate of the base unit m note the Sepam type and software version using the SFT2841 software Sepam Di
154. groups of settings 4 10 Indications 4 11 Control matrix 4 13 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 4 1 DE51156 Control and monitoring functions Protection functions Ko 4 2 Predefined control and monitoring functions Circuit breaker contactor control Signal lamps Annunciation Etc Predefined amp messages Description Sepam performs the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation Predefined functions The main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent cases of use They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs outputs are assigned The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs by customization of the control matrix using the SFT2841 software Control matrix The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from m protection functions m predefined control and monitoring functions m logic inputs to the following output data m output relays m 9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam m triggering of disturbance recording Operating principle The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3 phases m acquisition of input data O results of protection function processing O external logic data connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input output module O remote control orders TC received
155. h record comprises two files m configuration file with suffix CFG m data file with suffix DAT The data of each record may be transferred via the Modbus link It is possible to transfer 1 or 2 records to a remote monitoring and control system The record may be transferred as many times as possible until it is overwritten by a new record If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is being transferred the oldest record is altered If a command e g a remote reading or remote setting request is carried out during the transfer of a disturbance recording record the record is not disturbed Time setting Each record can be dated Time setting of Sepam is described in the Time tagging of events section Transferring records The transfer requests are made record by record i e one configuration file and one data file per record The master sends the commands in order to m find out the characteristics of the records stored in an identification zone m read the contents of the different files m acknowledge each transfer m reread the identification zone to ensure that the record still appears in the list of records available PCRED301005EN June 2005 Disturbance recording Reading the identification zone Given the volume of data to be transmitted the master must ensure that there are data to be recovered and prepare the exchanges when necessary The identification zone described below is read by the readin
156. haracteristics as Sepam base units Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Standard Distributed power supply Consumption EIA 4 wire RS 485 differential External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Number of Sepam units Maximum length with Maximum length with 24 V DC power supply 12 V DC power supply 5 320 m 1000 m 10 750m 20 160 m 450 m 25 125 m 375 m Description and dimensions A and Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply 12 V DC or 24 V DC Grounding earthing terminal 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active Sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for RS 485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 Q to be set to m XC if the module is not at one end of the RS 485 network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the RS 485 network 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 6 mm Connection m connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m connection of earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section gt 6 mm or cable with cross section 2 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm m the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the ne
157. he basis unit steadily on relay O4 watchdog in fault position output relays dropped out all protection units inhibited display showing fault message AJ E N indicator on DSM303 module remote advanced UMI option flashing Downgraded operation The base unit is in working order all the protection functions activated are operational and indicates that one of the optional modules such as DSM303 MET148 2 or MSA141 is faulty or else that a module is configured but not connected According to the model this operating mode is conveyed by m Sepam with integrated advanced UMI UD base O ON indicator on Oo N indicator on the base unit flashing including when the display is out of order off Oo AN indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on The display shows a partial fault message and indicates the type of fault by a code O code 1 inter module link fault O code 3 MET module unavailable O code 4 MSA module unavailable m Sepam with remote advanced UMI UX base DSM303 O ON indicator on Oo NAN indicator on the base unit flashing o amp indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on O the display indicates the type of fault by a code same as above Special case of faulty DSM303 O ON indicator on o amp indicator on base unit flashing o amp indicator on DSM steadily on O display off This Sepam operating mode is also transmitted via the communication link Temperature sensor fault E
158. he zone contents remain valid until the next request is made m 0000h no request frame has been formulated yet as it is the case in particular when the Sepam is switched on The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply frame are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant m XXFFh with function code xx different from 00 and FFh The function for which the remote reading request has been made is not valid The function is not included in that particular Sepam or access to settings is impossible both in read and write mode 5 24 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Access to remote settings Description of settings Data format All the settings are transmitted in signed 32 bit whole number form encoding as a complement of 2 Particular setting value 7FFF FFFFh means that the setting is outside the validity range 1 The Enabled or Disabled setting is encoded as follows O Disabled 1 Enabled 2 The tripping curve setting is encoded as follows 0 definite 1 standard inverse time 9 IEC VIT 2 long time inverse 10 IEC EIT C 3 very inverse time 11 IEEE Mod inverse 4 extremely inverse time 12 IEEE Very inverse 5 ultra inverse time 13 IEEE Extr inverse 6 RI 14 IAC inverse 7 IEC SIT A 15 IAC very inverse 8 IEC LTI B 16 IAC extr
159. ime protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay Definite time protection principle IDMT protection For li gt Is the time delay depends on the value of li Ib Ib basis current of the protected equipment defined when the general parameters are set T corresponds to the time delay for li lb 5 IDMT protection principle 3 10 DE50557 Negative sequence unbalance ANSI code 46 The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations m for Is Ib lt li Ib lt O 2 3 19 li lb m for 0 5 lt li lb lt 5 _ _4 64 li lb m for li lb gt 5 t T Block diagram 1 12 li gt IS 3 Characteristics Curve Setting Definite IDMT Is set point Setting Definite time IDMT Resolution Accuracy Time delay T operation time at 5 Ib Setting Definite time IDMT Resolution Accuracy 1 Definite time IDMT Pick up drop out ratio Characteristic times Operation time Overshoot time Reset time 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 ef Merlin Gerin F E time delayed output pick up signal 10 Ib x Is lt 500 Ib 10 Ib lt Is lt 50 Ib 1 5 100 ms lt x T lt 300 s 100 ms lt T lt 1s 10 ms ou 1 digit 2 or 25 ms 5 or 35 ms 93 5 5 pick up lt 55 ms lt 35 ms lt 55 ms PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Negative sequence unb
160. in the advanced UMI screen plus the following functions m setting of Sepam internal clock via the general characteristics tab It should be noted that Sepam saves the date and time in case the auxiliary power supply fails lt 24 hours m implementation of the disturbance recording function via the Fault recording menu OPG validation inhibition of the function recovery of Sepam files start up of SFT2826 m consultation of the history of the last 64 Sepam alarms with time tagging m access to Sepam diagnostic data in the Sepam tab box included in Sepam diagnosis m in Parameter setting mode the switchgear diagnositic values may be modified operation counter cumulative breaking current to reset the values after a change of breaking device PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Connection window The SFT2841 software connection window is used m to select an existing Sepam network or configure a new one m to set up the connection to the selected Sepam network m toselect one Sepam unit from the network and access its parameters settings and operation and maintenance information Configuration of a Sepam network Several configurations can be defined for the various Sepam installations A Sepam network configuration is identified by a name It is saved on the SFT2841 PC in a file in the SFT2841 installation directory default C Program Files Schnei
161. indication inhibit start inhibit closing indication PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE50368 Protection functions Example 1 The following data are available m time constants for on operation T1 and off operation T2 o T1 25 min o T2 70 min m maximum curve in steady state Imax lb 1 05 Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax lb 110 Please note if the motor absorbs a current of 1 05 Ib in steady state the heat rise calculated by the thermal overload protection will reach 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I Ib 0 95 Knegative 4 5 usual value The other thermal overload parameters do not need to be set They are not taken into account by default Example 2 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax Ib 1 05 Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax Ib 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I lb 0 95 The manufacturer s hot cold curves may be used to determine the heating time constant T1 The approach consists of placing the Sepam hot cold curves below the motor curves Figure 1 motor thermal resistance and thermal overload tripping curves A motor cold curve Sepam cold curve motor hot curve Sepam hot curve a time before tripping s N O
162. input connection Checking of residual voltage input connection Checking of logic input and output connection Validation of the complete protection chain Checking of optional module connection Test sheet Maintenance 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 12 7 12 7 13 7 13 7 14 7 16 7 18 7 19 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 1 Use User Machine Interfaces Sepam User Machine Interfaces Two different levels of user machine interface UMI are offered on the front panel of Sepam m basic UMI with signal lamps for installations operated via a remote system with no need for local operation m advanced UMI with keypad and graphic LCD display giving access to all the information necessary for local operation and Sepam parameter setting SFT2841 setting and operating software The UMI on the front panel of Sepam may be completed by the SFT2841 PC software tool which may be used for all Sepam parameter setting local operation and customization functions The SFT2841 setting and operating software is supplied on CD ROM along with the SFT2826 program for recovering disturbance recording files the interactive introduction to the Sepam range and all the Sepam documentation in PDF The CCA783 PC connecting cord to be ordered separately connects the PC to the port on the Sepam front panel so that the SFT2841 package can be used in point to point connected mode
163. interfaces Connection Power supply and Sepam m the ACE969 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green RJ45 fittings m the ACE969 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 230 V AC Terminals Type e1 e2 supply Screw terminals A Protective earth a Functional earth 4 mm ring lugs DE51845 DE Wiring m wiring without fittings O 1 wire with max cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with max cross section 0 2 to 1 mm 2 AWG 24 16 O stripped length 8 to 10 mm m wiring with fittings O recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm wires O tube length 8 2 mm O stripped length 8 mm 1 green yellow wire max length 3 m and max cross section 2 5 mm Earthing braid supplied for connection to cubicle grounding 2 wire RS485 communication ports S LAN or E LAN m connection of RS485 twisted pair S LAN or E LAN to black terminals A and B m connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to green terminals V and V m the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable O the network cable must be stripped O the cable shielding must be rolled back and in contact with the clamp O shielding continuity of incoming and outgoing
164. inverse 0 010 0 023 0 02 0 241 IEEE very inverse 3 922 0 098 2 0 138 IEEE extremely inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 0 081 Characteristic curves A B Cc D E B IAC inverse 0 208 0 863 0 800 0 418 0 195 0 297 IAC very inverse 0 090 0 795 0 100 1 288 7 958 0 165 IAC extremely inverse 0 004 0 638 0 620 1 787 0 246 0 092 TMS multiplying factor The time delay of IDMT tripping curves except for RI curve may be set m either by T sec operation time at 10 x Is m or by TMS factor that corresponds to T in the equations above p Example t l 2x TMs with TMS I i 1 The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with TMS 1 or T 1 5 sec Timer hold delay T1 m definite time enables the function to be activated with intermittent faults m IDMT makes it possible to emulate an electromagnetic disk protection relay t x1 with T TMS S T1 timer hold delay setting timer hold delay for reset 0 and TMS 1 T tripping time delay setting at 10 Is B basic tripping curve value at 10 Is 10 1 The standardized or estimated values of T1 are available in the SFT2841 software help f Merlin Gerin 3 37 3 38 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Control and monitoring Contents functions Description 4 2 Definition of symbols 4 3 Assignment of logic inputs outputs 4 4 Circuit breaker contactor control 4 5 Logic discrimination 4 8 Disturbance recording triggering Switching of
165. isplay of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh interval 1 second typical Waiting time after overload tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal Capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit M Display format o S significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh period 1 second typical s O PCRED301005EN June 2005 Machine operation assistance functions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Starting current and starting overload time Operation The starting overload time is the time between the moment at which one of the 3 phase currents exceeds 1 2 Ib and the moment at which the 3 currents drop back below 1 2 Ib The maximum phase current obtained during this period is the starting overload current The 2 values are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Starting overload time Measurement r
166. ite 3 6 16 Read 3 Read 3 Read 3 Read 3 3 Merlin Gerin 5 9 Modbus communication Status Sepam check word TS1 TS16 TS17 TS32 TS33 TS48 TS49 TS64 Logic inputs Measurements 11 phase current gain x 1 I2 phase current gain x 1 I3 phase current gain x 1 IO residual current gain x 1 Im1 average phase current x 1 x 1 x 1 Im2 average phase current Im3 average phase current 11 phase current gain x 10 I2 phase current gain x 10 I3 phase current gain x 10 IO residual current gain x 10 IM1 average phase current x10 IM2 average phase current x10 IM3 average phase current x10 IM1 peak demand phase current IM2 peak demand phase current IM3 peak demand phase current Reserved Itrip1 tripping current Itrip2 tripping current Itrip3 tripping current ItripO tripping current Cumulative breaking current Number of operations Operating time Charging time Reserved Running hours counter Thermal capacity used Operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Unbalance ratio Starting time overload Starting current overload Start inhibit time delay Number of starts allowed Temperatures 1 to 8 Reserved Note Only the measurements related to the Sepam function are significant The values of the others are zero 5 10 Word address 100 101 102 103 104 105 Word address 106 107 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F 110F 111
167. ith the values recorded in the parameter and protection setting file m correct any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered correctly proceeding as indicated in the SFT2841 software section of the Use chapter of this manual Conclusion Once the checking has been done and proven to be conclusive as of that phase the parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are considered to be final In order to be conclusive the tests which follow must be performed with these parameter and protection settings no temporary modification of any of the values entered with the aim of facilitating a test is permissible s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning Checking of phase current input connection 1 A 5 A current transformers Description Check to be carried out for Sepam S20 T20 or M20 when phase currents are measured by 1 Aor 5 A current transformers Procedure m to inject a current into the phase 1 input connect the single phase generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided in accordance with the diagram below EICH oon De DE52244 Sepam 20 T20 M20 test terminal m turn on the generator m inject the CT rated secondary current i e 1 Aor5A m use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase 1 current value is approximately equal to the CT rated primary current m if the residual current is calculated by taking the sum of the 3 phase
168. its are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network over an Ethernet Modbus TCP IP gateway for example EGX gateway PE50589 Configuration of the Modbus TCP IP gateway See the setup manual for the gateway used In general the gateway should be assigned an IP address The configuration parameters for the gateway s RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Configuration of communication on SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network on SFT2841 the following communication parameters must be defined m P address IP address of the remote Modbus TCP IP gateway m time out from 100 to 3000 ms A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most installations Communication via the TCP IP gateway may however be slowed down if other applications want Modbus TCP IP access at the same time The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds m number of retries from 1 to 6 Note 1 SFT2841 uses the Modbus TCP IP communication protocol Although communication is IP based use of SFT2841 is restricted to a local installation network based on an Ethernet network LAN Local Area Network The operation of SFT2841 over a WAN Wide Area Network cannot be guaranteed because of the presence of some routers or firewalls that may reject the Modbus pr
169. k O ACE949 2 for connection to a 2 wire RS 485 network o ACE959 for connection to a 4 wire RS 485 network o ACE937 for connection to a fiber optic star network m communication interfaces to connect Sepam to two networks o ACE969TP for connection to one 2 wire RS 485 Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS 485 E LAN engineering communication network o ACE969FO for connection to one fiber optic Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS 485 E LAN engineering communication network Data available The data available depend on the type of Sepam Measurement readout phase and earth fault currents peak demand phase currents tripping currents cumulative breaking current phase to phase phase to neutral and residual voltages frequency temperatures thermal capacity used starts per hour and inhibit time running hours counter motor starting current and time operating time before overload tripping waiting time after tripping operating time and number of operations circuit breaker charging time Program logic data readout m a table of 64 pre assigned remote indications TS depends on the type of Sepam enables the readout of program logic data status m readout of the status of 10 logic inputs Remote control orders Writing of 16 impulse type remote control orders TC in either direct mode or SBO Select Before Operate mode via 16 selection bits Other functions
170. ke into account thermal withstand with locked rotors This second set of parameters is taken into account when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is Accounting for negative sequence current In the case of motors with coiled rotors the presence of a negative sequence component increases the heat rise in the motor The negative sequence component of the current is taken into account in the protection by the equation leq JIph K 1li in which Iphis the greatest phase current li is the negative sequence component of the current K is an adjustable factor K may have the following values 0 2 25 4 5 9 For an asynchronous motor K is determined as follows K 2 re 1 in which Cn Cd rated torque and starting torque ae 5 Ib Id basis current and starting current g rated slip Saving of heat rise When the protection trips the current heat rise increased by 10 is saved Increasing by 10 makes it possible to take into account the average heat rise of motors when starting The saved value is reset to zero when the heat rise decreases sufficiently for the time before starting to be zero The saved value is used when the power returns after a Sepam power failure so as to start up again with the heat rise that triggered tripping J Merlin Gerin 3 13 DE50243 Protection functions Start inhibit The thermal overload protection can inhibit the closing of the motor s control device until the heat rise drop
171. l 7 4 B PCRED301005EN June 2005 Use SFT2841 setting and operating software General screen organization A Sepam document is displayed on the screen via a graphic interface that has the conventional Windows features All the SFT2841 software screens are set up in the same way i e m A title bar with O name of the application SFT2841 o identification of the Sepam document displayed o window manipulation handles E menu bar to access all the SFT2841 software functions unavailable functions are dimmed E toolbar a group of contextual icons for quick access to the main functions also accessed via the menu bar E D work zone available to the user presented in the form of tab boxes E O status bar with the following information relating to the active document alarm on O identification of the connection window o SFT2841 operating mode connected or not connected o type of Sepam O Sepam editing identification o identification level O Sepam operating mode o PC date and time PE10053 Example of Sepam configuration screen kh ee eee ee ee ee ehi PE10054 mi On line help The operator may look up on line help at any time via the command in the menu bar To use the on line help a browser such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer MS is required sd Example of general characteristics screen PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 5 Use Not connecte
172. l box 7 28 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning Checking of residual voltage input connection Description Check to be carried out for Sepam B21 or B22 when the residual voltage is measured by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta arrangement Procedure m connect the single phase voltage generator to the terminal test box using the plug provided in accordance with the diagram below DE52247 Sepam B21 B22 Test terminal box m turn on the generator m apply the VT rated secondary phase to neutral voltage Uns V3 m use the SFT2841 software to check the residual voltag value Vo m Vo should be equal to the VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage Unp V3 or Vnp if the VTs deliver Uns V3 to the secondary circuit m Vo should be equal to the VT rated primary phase to phase voltage Unp or 3 Vnp if the VTs deliver Uns 3 to the secondary circuit m turn the generator off m put the cover back on the terminal test box PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 29 Commissioning MT10588 m a ys o n SFT2841 Input output indicator status screen MT10589 m a a m m a o SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis output relay test screen 7 30 ef Merlin Gerin Checking of logic input and output connection Checking of logic input connection Procedure Proceed as follows for each input m if the input supply voltage is present u
173. l the protection functions may be accessed remotely Exchange principle Remote setting is allowed for Sepam units Remote setting is carried out for a given function relay by relay It takes place in two steps E first of all the master indicates the function code and relay number followed by the values of all the settings in the a write request frame The request is acknowledged to free the network m the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a reply frame a reply zone designed for checking that the settings have been processed Each function has its own particular reply zone contents The contents are same as those of the reply frame To use remote setting it is necessary to make all the settings for the function concerned even if some of them have not changed Request frame The request is made by the master using a write n words function 16 operation at the address 2100h The zone to be written contains a maximum of 125 words It contains the values of all the settings It consists of the following 2100h special field for each function The content of the address 2100h may be read using a read n words function 3 The function code field may have the following values m 01h to 99h BCD encoding for the list of protection functions F01 to F99 The relay number field is used as follows m for protection it indicates the relay involved varying from 1 to N N being the m
174. lance CTs Function The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are used for direct residual current measurement The only difference between them is the diameter Due to their low voltage insulation they may only be used on cables Characteristics Inner diameter 120 mm 200 mm Weight 0 6 kg 1 4 kg Accuracy 5 to 20 C 6 max from 25 C to 70 C Transformation ratio 1 470 Maximum permissible current 20kA 1s Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C Storage temperature 40 C to 85 C Dimensions 4 horizontal mounting 4 vertical mounting holes 5 holes 5 Dimen A B D E F H J K L sions CSH120 35 CSH200 a6 274 120 257 104 37 Assembly Group the MV cable or cables in the middle of the core balance CT Use non conductive binding to hold the cables Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage cable shielding earthing cables through the core balance CT HA Connection Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current IO input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m to residual current I0 input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m to residual current l O input on connector terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cable m sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m minimum cable cross section 0 93 mm AWG 18 m resistance per unit length lt 100 mQ m m minimum dielectric stre
175. lity EMC Directive 92 31 CEE Amendment o 93 68 CEE Amendment 73 23 CEE Low Voltage Directive o 93 68 CEE Amendment O UL Ta UL508 CSA C22 2 n 14 95 File E212533 CSA CSA C22 2 n 14 95 n 94 M91 n 0 17 00 File 210625 1 Sepam series 40 2 Except for communication 3 kV in common mode and 1kV in differential mode 3 Except for communication 1 kVrms 4 Sepam must be stored in its original packing PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 1 5 1 6 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Metering functions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Contents General settings Characteristics Phase current Residual current Average current and peak demand currents Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Frequency Temperature Tripping current Negative sequence unbalance Disturbance recording Running hours counter and operating time Thermal capacity used Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping Starting current and starting overload time Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay Cumulative breaking current and number of operations Operating time Charging time 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 1 Metering functions General settings Unp Uns Uns0O The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connect
176. lizes and a message appears on the display see example 1 m case of a fault that is not cleared O following instantaneous or time delayed tripping by the protection unit activation of the isolation time delay associated with the first active cycle At the end of the time delay a closing order is given which activates the memory time delay If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay a tripping order is given and the following reclosing cycle is activated O after all the active cycles have been run if the fault still persists a final trip order is given a message appears on the display and closing is locked out until acknowledgment takes place according to the parameter setting of the protection function m closing on a fault If the circuit breaker closes on a fault or if the fault appears before the end of the lockout time delay the recloser is inhibited Recloser inhibition conditions The recloser is inhibited according to the following conditions m voluntary open or close order m recloser put out of service m receipt of a lockout order on the lockout logic input 126 m appearance of a switchgear related fault such as trip circuit fault or unexecture control order fault m opening of the circuit breaker by external tripping via inputs 121 122 or 123 Characteristics Reclosing cycles Setting Number of cycles 1to4 Activation of cycle 1 Activation of cycles 2 3 and 4 Time dela
177. m status and of the Sepam communication status in particular All Sepam status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen Sepam communication diagnosis The operator is provided with the following information to assist with identifying and resolving communication problems m name of the protocol configured m Modbus interface version number m number of valid frames received CPT9 m number of invalid mistaken frames received CPT2 ef Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Link activity LED The ACE interface link activity LEDs are activated by variations in the signal on the Modbus network When the supervisor communicates with Sepam during transmission or reception these LEDs flash After wiring check the information given by the link activity LEDs when the supervisor operates Note Flashing indicates that there is traffic passing to or from Sepam it does not mean that the exchanges are valid Functional test If there is any doubt about correct operation of the link m run read write cycles in the test zone m use Modbus diagnosis function 8 Ssub code 0 echo mode The Modbus frames below transmitted or received by a supervisor are an example of a test performed when communication is set up Test zone Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0002 C75B Reception 01 03 04 0000 0000 FA33 Write Transmission 01 10 OCOO 0001 02 1234 6727 Reception 01 10 OCOO 0001 0299 Read Transmission 01 0
178. me constant T1 is lowered the thermal overload protection will trip earlier below point 2 There risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case see Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with U 0 9 Un The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve In this example the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 s starting from the cold state The following equation is used to obtain the EsO value 2 thecessary 2 T Es0 esas e 1 Sess Es2 b b with t necessary tripping time necessary starting from a cold state I processed QUIPMent Current 1 When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot cold curves the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate 2 The charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve may be used or else the equation of the curve which is given on page 3 13 3 15 DE50369 DE50370 Protection functions In numerical values the following is obtained 400 sec EsO 4 e 24 60sec 9 3035 31 By setting EsO 31 point 2 is moved downward to obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with motor s thermal resistance when cold see Figure 3 Please note A setting EsO 100 therefore means that the hot and cold curves are the same
179. means of a request frame The request is acknowledged in the Modbus sense of the term to free the network m the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a reply frame Each function has its own particular reply zone contents The time needed between the request and the reply is linked to Sepam s low priority cycle time and may vary by several tens to several hundreds of milliseconds Request frame The request is made by the master using a write word function 6 or 16 operation at the address 2080h of a 1 word frame consisting of the following 2080h Function code Relay number The content of the address 2080h may be read using a Modbus read word function 3 The function code field may have the following values m 01h to 99h BCD encoding for protection functions The relay number field is used as follows m for protection it indicates the relay involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of relays available in the Sepam m when only one relay is available this number field is not controlled Exception replies In addition to the usual cases Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if another remote reading request is being processed Reply frame The reply sent back by the Sepam fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125 words at the address 2000h which is composed the following 2000h 207Ch special field for each function
180. meter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam 3V 3V sum V1 V2 V3 U21 U32 U13 VO Vd f None None Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam 3V External VT V1 V2 V3 VO U21 U32 U13 Vd f None None Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam U21 U32 None U21 U32 U13 Vd f V1 V2 V3 VO 59N 27S Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam U21 External VT U21 VO f U32 U13 V1 V2 V3 Vd 47 27D 278 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam U21 None U21 f U32 U13 V1 V2 V3 VO Vd 47 27D 59N 27S 6 11 Installation 1 Aor5 ACT block and connection diagram The curren
181. must be installed and connected in accordance with the instructions in the Installation chapter of this manual Preliminary checks The following preliminary checks must be made m check the CCA612 cord connection between the ACE interface and the Sepam base unit m check the ACE Modbus communication port connection m check the complete configuration of the ACE m for the ACE969 check the auxiliary power supply connection Checking the operation of the ACE interface You can use the following to check that an ACE interface is operating correctly m the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE m the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam O on the Diagnosis screen O on the Communication configuration screens Link activity LED for ACE949 2 ACE959 and ACE937 The link activity LED for ACE949 2 ACE959 and ACE937 interfaces flashes when Sepam transmission or reception is active Indicator LEDs on the ACE969 green on LED ACE969 energized red key LED ACE969 interface status LED off ACE969 configured and communication operational LED flashing ACE969 configuration error or ACE969 not configured LED on ACE969 error link activity LED S LAN Tx flashing Sepam transmission active link activity LED S LAN Rx flashing Sepam reception active HBHOcoO E Diagnosis using SFT2841 software Sepam diagnosis screen When connected to Sepam the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general Sepa
182. n a MV core balance CT with a ratio of ACE990 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the installation Setting range from 0 1 InO to 15 InO with InO k n where n n number of core balance CT turns and k factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam with a choice of 20 discrete values from 0 00578 to 0 26316 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 6 9 Installation Base unit Connection of voltage inputs B21 and B22 types L1 EL L3 a To E z ia a To communication network interface To optional modules Connector Type Ref Cable A Screw type CCA620 1 wire 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 2 wires 0 2 to 1 mm2 gt AWG 24 16 Ring lug 6 35 mm CCA622 B Screw type CCT640 1 wire 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 2 wires 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 C RJ45 CCA612 D RJ45 CCA770 L 0 6 m CCA772 L 2 m CCA774 L 4m 6 10 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation DE51831 Base unit Other voltage input connection schemes The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector item B on Sepam B21 and B22 The CCT640 connector contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching of the VTs and Sepam input circuits Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor para
183. n and parameter setting modes There are 3 levels of use m operator level used to access all the screens in read mode and does not require any passwords m protection setter level requires the entry of the first password eo key allows protection setting key m parameter setter level requires the entry of the second password eo key allows modification of the general settings as well key Only general setters may modify the passwords The passwords have 4 digits PCRED301005EN June 2005 Advanced UMI Access to data Example measurement loop energizing Measurements numerical values I rms Measurements bar graphs Average Overcurrent lo bar graph Temperatures temperature sensors Temperatures temperature sensors b51 I gt gt 51 lo gt 51N lo gt gt 5iN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10808 passwords Eyam 7 13 Use Advanced UMI White keys for current operation D ty The metering key is used to display the variables measured by Sepam on b BS St b gt 5iN b 5iN ext O off lon Trip MT10829 l1 162A rus I2 161A rus I8 163A rms a key I gt gt 51 b gt 5iN lo gt gt 5iN ext 0 off lon Trip en en oe EEE EE E ee MT10286 The diagnosis key provides access to diagnostic data on the breaking device and additional measurements to facilitate fault analysis Tripli 162A Tripl2 161A Tripl3 250A Triplo 250
184. n function only operates after Sepam has been time set i e after the disappearance of the incorrect time event Any time changes greater than 4 seconds in amplitude are made by sending a new time frame The switch from summer time to winter time and vice versa is made in this way as well There is a temporary loss of synchronism when the time is changed The external synchronization mode requires additional equipment a synchronization clock to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse If Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status and if the difference in synchronism between the nearest ten second period and the receipt of the synchronization pulse is greater than the synchronism error for 2 consecutive synchronization pulses it switches into non synchronous status and generates the appearance of a not synchronous event Likewise if Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status the failure to receive a synchronization pulse for 200 seconds generates the appearance of a not synchronous event f Merlin Gerin 5 21 Modbus communication Access to remote settings Reading of remote settings remote reading Settings accessible for remote reading Reading of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely Exchange principle Remote reading of settings takes place in two steps m first of all the master indicates the code of the function for which it wishes to know the settings by
185. n is initialized with the current values of the remote annunciation and logic input status without creating any events related to these data After the initialization phase event detection is activated It can only be interrupted by saturation of the internal event storage queue or by the presence of a major fault in Sepam Date and time An absolute date and time are generated internally by Sepam comprising the following information Year Month Day Hour minute millisecond The date and time format is standardized ref IEC870 5 4 Sepam s internal clock is not saved it needs to be time set via the communication network each time the Sepam is energized Sepam series 20 s internal clock may be set in two different ways m by the remote monitoring and control system via the Modbus link m via the SFT2841 software general characteristics screen The time that is tagged on events is encoded in 8 bytes as follows b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00 word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y word 1 0 0 0 0 M M M M_O 0 0 D DB D D D word2 0 0 0 H H H H H 0 0 mn mn mn mn mn mn word3 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms word 4 Y 1 byte for years varies from O to 99 years The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is greater than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn
186. n the type of modem used the configuration will either be via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual Characteristics of the industrial profile configuration AT command Transmission in buffered mode without error correction NO forces amp Q6 Data compression deactivated CO Line quality monitoring deactivated EO DTR signal assumed to be permanently off allows the modem amp DO connection to be established automatically on an incoming call CD signal off when carrier is present amp C1 All reports made to Sepam blocked Q1 Character echo suppression EO No flow control amp KO CE PCRED301005EN June 2005 e2 te Q WwW uw oa A a me a a a a i i J F 3 j F E W m PE50592 HHnnnen Use a Sepam network connected to SFT2841 Howe A J pay oy N ti 48 e jm pE e ee E hoT o i H es ce at j E bk ci H le i Es Li Access to parameters and settings for a Sepam series 80 connected to a communication network PCRED301005EN June 2005 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Identification of Sepam units connected to the communication network The Sepam units connected to the communication network are identified by their Modbus address These addresses may be configured in
187. nciple The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that causes tripping of the breaking device by Sepam Procedure m select one of the protection functions that triggers the breaking device m according to the type of Sepam inject a fault current or voltage m observe the tripping of the breaking device PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 31 Commissioning 7 32 Checking of optional module connection Checking of temperature sensor inputs to the MET148 2 module The temperature monitoring function provided by Sepam T20 or M20 units checks the connection of each sensor that is configured An RTD FAULT alarm is generated whenever one of the sensors is detected as being short circuited or disconnected absent To identify the faulty sensor or sensors m display the temperature values measured by Sepam T20 or M20 using the SFT2841 software m check the consistency of the temperatures measured O the temperature displayed is if the sensor is short circuited T lt 35 C O the temperature displayed is if the sensor is disconnected T gt 205 C Checking of analog output connection to the MSA141 module m identify the measurement associated by parameter setting to the analog output using the SFT2841 software m simulate if necessary the measurement linked to the analog output by injection m check the consistency between the value measured by Sepam and the indication giv
188. nction 8 reading of diagnosis counters Sepam identified by its number in the first byte of the request frame or addressed to o function 11 reading of Modbus event counters all the Sepam broadcasting O function 15 writing of n bits O function 16 writing of n words m communication management functions O function 8 O function 11 reading of Modbus event counter O function 43 sub function 14 reading of identification The following exception codes are supported m 1 unknown function code MT10204 Modbus diagnosis broadcasting m 2 incorrect address E 3 incorrect data m 4 not ready cannot process request m 7 not acknowledged remote reading and setting slave slave slave Response time Broadcast commands are necessarily write commands The communication coupler response time Tr is Iess No replies are transmitted by the Sepam than 15 ms including a 3 character silence approximately 3 ms at 9600 bauds This time is given with the following parameters Trs15ms Tr lt 15ms MT10524 request m 9600 bauds m format 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit reply AE master slave broadcasting question reply It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of the protocol unless the master is a central computer which requires the corresponding programming All Modbus exchanges include 2 messages a request by the master and a reply by the Sepam All
189. nd protection setting file click on the icon for the relevant Sepam family Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 Welcome window m To open an existing parameter and protection setting file click on the icon for the relevant Sepam family Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 Sepam series 80 Using SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit oma Pisco Connected mode to a single Sepam unit is used during commissioning m to upload download and modify Sepam parameters and settings m to have all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to the connector port on the front panel of the Sepam via an RS 232 port using the CCA783 cord DE52069 CCA783 SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit To open the parameter and protection setting file on the Sepam once it is connected to the PC click on the icon Ph Using SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network Connected mode to a Sepam network is used during operation m to manage the protection system m to check the status of the electrical distribution system To m to diagnose any incident occurring on the electrical distribution system supervisor The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to a group of Sepam units via a communication network connection via serial link telephone line or Ethernet This network forms the E LA
190. nd with switching from on setting group to the other controlled by a logic order m Earth fault protection insensitivity to transformer switching m Detection of phase unbalance m RMS thermal protection which takes into account external operating temperature and ventilation operating rates m Rate of change of frequency protection ROCOF for a fast and reliable disconnection Communication Sepam can be connected to a supervision communication network S LAN based on the following communication protocols m Modbus RTU m DNP3 m IEC 60870 5 103 All the data needed for centralized equipment management from a remote monitoring and control system are available via the communication port m reading all measurements alarms protection settings m writing breaking device remote control orders Note 2 manuals describe the use of DNP3 and IEC 60870 5 103 protocols for all Sepam units m DNP3 communication user manual reference SEPED305001EN m EC 60870 5 103 communication user manual reference SEPED305002EN Diagnosis 3 types of diagnosis data for improved operation m network and machine diagnosis tripping current unbalance ratio disturbance recording m switchgear diagnosis cumulative breaking current operating time m diagnosis of the protection unit and additional modules continuous self testing watchdog Control and monitoring Circuit breaker program logic ready to use requiring no auxiliary relays or additional
191. nected to the ACE990 interface The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990 interface input terminals To define the 2 inputs it is necessary to know the following m core balance CT ratio 1 n m core balance CT power m close approximation of rated current InO InO is a Sepam general setting and defines the earth fault protection setting range between 0 1 InO and 15 InO The table below may be used to determine m the 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT secondary m the type of residual current sensor to set m the exact value of the rated residual current InO setting given by the following formula In0 k x number of core balance CT turns with k the factor defined in the table below The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for correct operation the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the ACE990 input terminal with the lowest index Ex K value ACE990 input Residual current Min MV core terminals to be sensor setting balance CT connected power 0 00578 E1 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00676 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00885 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00909 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01136 E2 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01587 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01667 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 02000 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 02632 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 04000 ACE990 range 1 0 2 VA 0 05780 ACE990
192. ned remote control bits TC The zone may be read or written using the word functions or bit functions See section on remote control orders Bit address 1FOO 1F10 Access R W R W R W Protection setting zone The protection setting zone is an exchange table which is used to read and set protections Access R R W R W Format 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS Accuracy 1 2 0 5A Accuracy 10 2 5V Modbus function enabled 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 3 4 6 16 Modbus function enabled 3 3 6 16 3 16 Unit 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 0 01 Hz 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V init to O Format 16S 5 11 Modbus communication Disturbance recording Choice of transfer function Identification zone Fault rec exchange word Fault rec data See section on fault recorder Test zone Word address Test 0C00 OCOF Word address 2200 2203 2204 2228 2300 2301 237C Bit address C000 COOF COFO COFF Data addresses and encoding Fault recorder zone The fault recorder zone is an exchange table which is used to read records Access R W R R W R Test zone Modbus function enabled 3 16 3 3 6 16 3 The test zone is a 16 word zone that may be accessed via the communication link by all the functions in both read and write modes to facilitate communication testing at the time of commis
193. ngth 1000 V 700 Vrms It is essential for the CSH30 to be installed near Sepam Sepam CSH30 link less than 2 m Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not be more than 4 Q or 20 m maximum for 100 mQ m s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 E40468 DE52082 Installation CSH30 interposing ring CT Function The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers E44717 Characteristics On symmetrical DIN rail In vertical or horizontal position Vertical assembly of CSH30 Horizontal assembly of interposing ring CT CSH30 interposing ring CT Assembly DE50066 Connection The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer 1 A or 5 A by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT m 5 A rating 4 turns m 1 A rating 2 turns Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit PE50033 PE50034 m plug into the connector m plug into the connector m insert the transformer secondary wire m insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 core balance CT 4 through the CSH30 core balance CT times twice Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To r
194. ns V3 Result Display CT rated primary current l1 oO I2 IS CT rated primary current lO T Injected current value lO go Result Display VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage Unp V3 V1 o V2 V3 VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage Unp V3 VO o Residual voltage Unp V3 if Uns 3 VT VO oO Unp if Uns 3 VT Signatures 6 Ente 7 33 Commissioning Sepam has a large number of self tests that are carried out in the base unit and additional modules The purpose of the self tests is m to detect failures that may lead to nuisance tripping or the failure to trip when a fault occurs m to put Sepam in the fail safe position to avoid user errors m to notify the operator that a maintenance operation is required The Sepam diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software provides access to data on the status of the base unit and optional modules MT10587 SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen 7 34 S Merlin Gerin Maintenance Shutdown of the base unit in fail safe position The base unit goes into the fail safe position in the following conditions m detection of an internal failure by the self tests m sensor interface connector missing CCA630 CCA670 or CCA640 according to the type of application m no connection of one of the 3 LPCT sensors to the CCA670 connectors L1 L2 and L3 m MES module configured but missing The fail safe position is conveyed by ON indicator on N indicator on t
195. o After acknowledgment the 4 events in the event table are initialized to zero and the old acknowledged events are erased in Sepam Until the exchange word written by the master becomes X 0 with X number of the previous exchange that the master wishes to acknowledge the exchange word in the table remains at X number of previous events Sepam only increments the exchange number when new events are present X 1 number of new events If the event table is empty Sepam performs no processing operations when the master reads the event table or the exchange word The data are encoded in binary form Clearing an event queue Writing a value xxFFh in the exchange word any exchange number event number FFh reinitializes the corresponding event queue all stored events not yet transmitted are deleted Sepam in data loss 1 no data loss 0 status Sepam has an internal storage queue with a capacity of 64 events If the queue becomes saturated a data loss event is inserted by Sepam when each event table is read The detection of events stops and the most recent events are lost Data loss is managed independently for each of the two event tables When the tables are read at different rates data loss may occur at different times for each table or even in some cases appear only on the slowest channel Note the data loss bit of the Sepam check word corresponds to the status of the first reading table compatibili
196. o protect equipment motors transformers generators lines capacitors against overloads based on measurement of the current consumed Operation curve The protection gives a trip order when the heat rise E calculated according to the measurement of an equivalent current leq is greater than the set point Es The greatest permissible continuous current is Ib Es The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T m the calculated heat rise depends on the current consumed and the previous heat rise state m the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise m the hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 nominal heat rise 10 10 10 10 10 0 5 Cold curve leq i Ln E Gs oe Hot curve 2 ey Ln i gt T PES Alarm set point tripping set point Two set points may be set for heat rise m Es1 alarm m Es2 tripping Hot state set point When the function is used to protect a motor this fixed set point is designed for detection of the hot state used by the number of starts function Heat rise and cooling time constants Heat rise time constant PCRED301005EN June 2005 MT10420 T2 Cooling time constant Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS For self ventilated rotating machines cooling is more effective when the machine is running than when it is stopped Running and stopping of the equipment are calculate
197. o remote settings ANSI 50N 51N or 50G 51G Earth fault Function number 02xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data 1 Reserved 2 Group A tripping curve 3 Group A IsO set point 4 Group A tripping time delay 5 Group A timer hold curve 6 Group A timer hold delay 7 Group A H2 restraint 8 Reserved 9 ON OFF 10 Group B tripping curve 11 Group B IsO set point 12 Group B tripping time delay 13 Group B timer hold curve 14 Group B timer hold delay 15 Group B H2 restraint 16 Reserved ANSI 59 Phase to phase overvoltage Function number 11xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data 1 Enabled or disabled 2 Us set point 3 Tripping time delay 4to8 ANSI 59N Neutral voltage displacement Reserved Function number 12xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data 1 Enabled or disabled 2 Vs0O set point 3 Tripping time delay 4to8 Reserved ANSI 66 Starts per hour Function number 0701 Setting O O01 RB P Data Enabled or disabled Period of time Total number of starts Number of consecutive hot starts Number of consecutive starts Time delay between starts Format Unit o 0 1 A 10 ms 10 ms 4 D D 0 1 A 10 ms 10 ms 4 Format Unit Unp 10 ms Format Unit Q Unp 10 ms Format Unit hours 1 r minutes 5 29 Modbus communication 5 30 Access to remote settings ANSI 79 Recloser function Func
198. on 50N 51N unit 2 lo gt gt 51N LED 5 Ext LED 6 LED 7 Circuit breaker open 111 O off LED 8 Circuit breaker closed 112 lon LED 9 Tripping by circuit breaker control Trip 1 Assignment by default with MES1 14 The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software m the assignment of signal lamps to events is to be defined in the control matrix screen m editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the Sepam menu s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 PE50610 Control and monitoring functions es mi E co ka l m T E Ti LECT ES Dirik E S aj Hn 5 mar a E 5 F E tedetdadwdd ial TOL TT SFT2841 control matrix Data All of the application protection functions 79 cleared fault 79 permanent fault Logic inputs 111 to 114 and 121 to 126 BI transmission TCS CB control fault Sensor fault Pick up Watchdog PCRED301005EN June 2005 Control matrix The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and signal lamps to information produced by the protection units program logic and logic inputs Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the SFT2841 software tool Meaning Protection time delayed output and additional outputs when applicable The recloser function has sucessfully reclosed The circuit breaker is definitively o
199. on is chosen at the time of Sepam parameter setting The messages are visible on the display units of Sepams equipped with the advanced UMI and in the SFT2841 Alarms screen m the number and type of predefined messages depend on type of Sepam The table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages List of messages English factory French PHASE FAULT DEFAUT PHASE EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE THERMAL ALARM ECHAUF ALARME THERMAL TRIP ECHAUF DECL UNBALANCE DESEQUILIBRE ROTOR BLOCKING BLOCAGE ROTOR STR LOCKED ROTP BLOC ROTOR DEM LONG START DEMARRAGE LONG START INHIBIT DEMARRAGE INHIBE UNDER CURRENT COURANT lt lt OVERVOLTAGE TENSION gt gt UNDERVOLTAGE TENSION lt lt UNDERVOLTAGE TENSION lt lt UNDERVOLT V1 TENSION lt lt V1 UNDERVOLT V2 TENSION lt lt V2 UNDERVOLT V3 TENSION lt lt V3 Vo FAULT DEFAUT Vo OVER FREQ FREQUENCE gt gt UNDER FREQ FREQUENCE lt lt ROCOF DERIV FREQ OVER TEMP ALM T ALARME OVER TEMP TRIP T DECL RTD S FAULT DEFAUT SONDES THERMOS ALARM THERMO ALARME THERMOS TRIP THERMOS DECL BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH ALARME BUCHH GAS TRIP BUCHH GAZ DECL PRESSURE TRIP PRESSION DECL THERMIS ALARM THERM ST ALARME THERMIST TRIP THERMIS DECL TRIP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DECL CONTROL FAULT DEFAUT COMPE PERMANENT FAULT DEFAUT PERMANT CLEARED FAULT DEFAUT ELIMINE 1 According to type of Sepam and Sepam equipped with advanced UMI or SFT2841 Messages by de
200. onsistency of the parameter and protection settings entered is checked O aclear message specifies the inconsistent value in the function sheet opened O values which become inconsistent following the modification of a parameter are replaced by and must be corrected 7 6 ef Merlin Gerin SFT2841 setting and operating software Use of the software Connected to Sepam mode Precaution When a laptop is used given the risks inherent to the accumulation of static electricity the customary precaution consists of discharging in contact with an earthed metal frame before phsycially connecting the CCA783 cord Plugging into Sepam m plugging of the 9 pin connector SUB D type into one of the PC communication ports Configuration of the PC communciation port via the Communication port function in the Options menu m plugging of the 6 pin connector into the connector round minidin type situated behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module Connection to Sepam 2 possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and Sepam m Connection function in the File menu m choice of connect to the Sepam at the start up of SFT2841 Once the connection with Sepam has been established Connected appears in the status bar and the Sepam connection window may be accessed in the work zone User identification The window intended for the entry of the 4 digit password is activated m via the
201. ontains 4 transformers which provide impedance matching and isolation between the VTs and Sepam input circuits Terminals B1 to B6 are intended for phase voltage measurement and B7 and B8 for residual voltage measurement case shown not connected if obtained by the sum of the 3 phase voltages DE50565 1 1 2 or 3 VTs case shown Installation of the CCT640 connector m insert the 2 connector pins into the slots on the base unit m flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9 pin SUB D connector principle similar to that of the MES module m tighten the mounting screw 2 Connection m the connections are made to the screw type connectors that may be accessed on the rear of the CCT640 item m wiring without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm 2 AWG 24 16 O stripped length 8 to 10 mm m wiring with fitting O recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm O tube length 8 2 mm o stripped length 8 mm m the CCT640 must be earthed by green yellow wire ring lug on the screw 4 safety in case the CCT640 become unplugged DE52152 S MT10514 OSSO OSO SRSOVSsS S S S 11 1264 10 114 10 3 gt 125 lt 9 8 124 lt 8 7 D 13 12347 122 lt 16 5 H5 iga DO 2 2 1 D m
202. otection Instantaneous O C EL 300 ms lt gt 300 ms lt gt 300 ms lt Time delayed O C A D O D S 0 inhibition time 112 closed position delay l CB open command S S a S a cycle 1 cycle 2 111 open position isolation time isolation delay time delay ol Ta gt l CB close command a a a A l Reclosing in progress TS35 permanent fault Definitive tripping message af TS37 3 30 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Overfrequency ANSI code 81H Operation The protection function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is above the set point and the positive sequence voltage is more than 20 of Vnp Unp v3 If a single VT is connected U21 the function picks up when the frequency is higher than the set point and the U21 voltage is more than 20 of Unp It includes a definite time delay T T O F gt Fs time delayed output pick up signal If there is only one sensor U21 the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CCT640 whatever the phase Block diagram 8 U32 S Vd U21 1 Vd gt 0 2 Vnp 1 or U21 gt 0 2 Unp if only one VT Characteristics Fs set point Setting 50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Accuracy 1 0 1 Hz Pick up drop out difference 0 2 Hz 0 1 Hz Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Char
203. otocol causing communication times that would be incompatible with Sepam Configuration window for the Ethernet TCP IP communication network Note 2 SFT2841 allows Sepam protection settings to be modified and direct activation of the outputs These operations which could involve the operation of electrical switchgear opening and closing and thus risk the safety of people and installations are protected by the Sepam password In addition to this protection the E LANs and S LANs must be designed as private networks protected from external actions by all suitable methods 7 8 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 PE50590 Use Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem PCRED301005EN June 2005 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Link via telephone modem The Sepams are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network using an industrial PSTN modem This modem is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual The PC may use an internal or an external modem This modem on the PC side is always the calling modem It must be installed and configured in accordance with the Windows modem installation procedure Configuration of the calling modem in SFT2841 When configuring a
204. outputs only O4 may be activated by the watchdog function fq Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation Base unit Connection of current input m NII DE51144 IC oO 11 10 8 7 5 To communication 4 network interface 2 N i 2p 1 To optional modules 20 T20 M20 types Connection to 1 A 5 A current sensors Connector Type Ref Cable A Screw type CCA620 1 wire 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 2 wires 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 Ring lug 6 35 mm CCA622 B Ring lug 4 mm CCA630 1 5 to 6 mm AWG 16 to AWG 10 z RAS Foca D RJ45 CCA770 L 0 6 m CCA772 L 2 m CCA774 L 4m PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 6 7 Installation Base unit Other current input connection schemes DE52170 DE52171 CCA670 DE51826 DOQUQU00 6 8 CCA630 Connection of 3x 1 Aor 5A sensors to the CCA630 connector The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs to the CCA630 connector The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the current based protection functions This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors to the CCA670 connector The connection of just one or two sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to switch to the fallback position The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows
205. pam to the communication network m converters and other accessories as options which are used for complete implementation of the communication network Communication interface selection guide 6 27 6 28 6 29 1 Only one connection possible S LAN or E LAN 2 Except with the Modbus protocol Converter Port to supervisor Port to Sepam Distributed power supply RS485 Protocol Modbus IEC 60870 5 103 DNP3 Power supply DC AC See details on page PCRED301005EN June 2005 6 30 Converter selection guide 1 RS232 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port ports Not supplied by EGX Supplied by ACE Supplied by ACE 110 to 220 V AC 110 to 220 V AC 6 34 6 36 1 2 wire RS 485 port Supplied by ACE 24 to 48 V DC 6 36 1 Ethernet port 10 100 base Tx 1 Ethernet port 10 100 base Tx and 1 Ethernet port 100 base Fx 2 wire or 4 wire RS485 2 2 wire RS 485 24V DC 100 to 240 V AC with adapter See EGX200 manual See EGX400 manual or 4 wire RS485 ports Not supplied by EGX 24V DC 100 to 240 V AC with adapter 6 25 DE51659 Installation Communication interface connection CCA612 connection cord Cord used to connect a communication interface to a Sepam base unit m length 3 m m fitted with 2 green RJ45 plugs Sepam communication interface connection Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80 DE5
206. pen after the reclosing cycles According to configuration Sending of the blocking information to the following Sepam in logic discrimination chain Trip circuit fault or mismatching of CB position contacts A circuit breaker open or close order has not been executed Hardware problem on an MET module or on an RTD Logical OR of the instantaneous output of all protection units Monitoring of Sepam operation Comments Impulse type output Impulse type output If MES114 module is configured O3 by default If the circuit breaker contactor control function is activated Always on O4 if used 4 13 4 14 fef Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301005EN June 2005 Presentation Presentation Modbus protocol Configuring the communication interfaces Commissioning and diagnosis Data addresses and encoding Time tagging of events Access to remote settings Disturbance recording Reading Sepam identification 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 5 8 5 17 5 22 5 31 5 33 5 1 Modbus communication 5 2 Presentation General Modbus communication allows Sepam to be connected to a supervisor or any other device with a master Modbus communication channel Sepam is always a slave station Sepam is connected to a Modbus communication network via a communication interface There is a choice of two types of communication interface m communication interfaces to connect Sepam to a single networ
207. protection is three phase m it picks up when one of the phase to phase voltages concerned is greater than the Us set point m the protection includes a definite time delay Block diagram g a T 0 S time delayed output U32 U gt Us U13 pick up signal Characteristics Us set point Setting 50 Unp to 150 Unp 2 Accuracy 2 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 135 Unp with TP 230 V v3 3 26 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Neutral voltage displacement ANSI code 59N Operation The protection function picks up if the residual voltage VO is above a VsO set point gt gt gt gt with VO V1 V2 V3 m it includes a definite time delay T m the residual voltage is either calculated from the 3 phase voltages or measured by an external VT Block diagram V1 V2 5 i yg jaken SE E E didi VO gt VsO time delayed output external VT pick up signal Characteristics Vs0 set point Setting 2 Unp to 80 Unp if VnsO sum of 3Vs 2 Unp to 80 Unp if Vns0 Uns V3 5 Unp to 80 Unp if Vns0 Uns 3 Accuracy 2 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97
208. riggered by different events according to control matrix parameter setting or by manual action m triggering by the grouping of all pick up signals of the protection functions in service m triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions m triggering by selected logic inputs m manual triggering by a remote control order TC 10 m manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool Disturbance recording may be m inhibited via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order TC8 m validated via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order TC9 Block diagram disturbance recording triggering 2 according to chosen protection z functions delayed outputs pick up disturbance recording triggering by selected logic inputs manual disturbance SFT2841 recording triggerin g triggering C10 disturbance recording triggering inhibition of eee disturbance recording TC8 triggering validation of SFT2841 disturbance recording TC9 triggering manual disturbance SFT2841 recording triggering TC10 Switching of groups of settings There are 4 relays for the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions split into two groups of 2 relays called group A and group B respectively The use of the protection relays is determined by parameter setting The switching of groups of settings function enables the group A or group B protection functions to be activated m according to the status of
209. rom 0 3 to 1 5 In 5 if lt 0 3 In Display format 9 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Integration interval 5 10 15 30 60 minutes 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 at In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 In J Merlin Gerin 2 5 Metering functions 2 6 Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage Phase to phase voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to phase voltages according to voltage sensor connections m U21 voltage between phases 2 and 1 m U32 voltage between phases 3 and 2 m U13 voltage between phases 1 and 3 It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Unp Unit V or kV Accuracy 2 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Unp 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 Unp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 V or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Un nominal rating set in the general settings 2 at Un in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Phase to neutral voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to neutral voltages m V1 pha
210. rom 10 to 60 s by 10 s steps The shorter the synchronization period the more accurate time tagging of status changes is The first time frame is used to initialize Sepam with the absolute date and time the following frames are used for the detection of any time changes The synchronization pulse is used to reset Sepam s internal clock In the initialization phase when Sepam is in non synchronous mode resetting is allowed within an amplitude of 4 seconds In the initialization phase the resetting process switching of Sepam into synchronous mode is based on a measurement of the difference between Sepam s current time and the nearest ten second period This measurement is taken at the time of the receipt of the synchronization pulse following the initialization time frame Resetting is allowed if the difference is less than or equal to 4 seconds in which case Sepam switches to synchronous mode As of that time after the switching to synchronous mode the resetting process is based on the measurement of a difference between Sepam s current time and the nearest ten second period at the time of the receipt of a synchronization pulse which is adapted to match the synchronization pulse period The synchronization pulse period is determined automatically by Sepam when it is energized based on the first two pulses received the synchronization pulse must therefore be operational before Sepam is energized The synchronizatio
211. s ASCII character strings Sepam series 20 accepts the read identification function conformity level 02 For a complete description of the function go to www modbus org The description below covers a subset of the function adapted to Sepam series 20 Implementation Request frame The request frame is made of the following components Field Size bytes Slave number 1 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 01 or 02 1 Type of read 1 Object number CRC16 2 The type of read is used to select a simplified 01 or a standard 02 description Sepam series 20 identification Reply frame The objects making up the Sepam series 20 The reply frame is made of the following components identification are listed below Field Size bytes Number Type Value Slave number 1 0 VendorName Merlin Gerin 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code 1 ProductCode Application EAN13 code 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 2 MajorMinorRevision Application version number 01 or 02 1 Type of read Vx yy 1 Conformity level 3 VendorURL www schneider electric com ee ee 1 Continuation frame flag none for Sepam 4 ProductName Sepam series 20 ee Reserved 5 ModelName Application name o n SES 1 Number of objects according to read type e g M20 Motor 1 Number of first object 6 UserAppName Sepam marking 1 Length first object Ig1 ASCII string of first object 1 Number n object 1 Length n object Ign
212. s Is set point Setting Accuracy Pick up drop out ratio T time delay Setting Accuracy 1 Resolution Characteristic times MT10426 TI_ Operating principle Operating time Overshoot time Reset time MT10865 pick up signal time delayed output Case of current sag 1 06 Is g Is E 0 1 Ib pick up gt _ lt signal 0 lt 15 ms time delayed output 0 Case of circuit breaker tripping 3 8 J Merlin Gerin 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Phase undercurrent T 0 time delayed output pick up signal 15 Ib x Is lt 100 Ib by steps of 1 5 106 5 for Is gt 0 1 In 50 ms lt x T lt 300 s 2 or 25 ms 10 ms or 1 digit lt 50 ms lt 35 ms lt 40 ms PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Temperature monitoring ANSI code 38 49T Operation This protection is associated with an RTD of the Pt100 platinum 100 Q at 0 C or nickel 100 Q nickel 120 Q type in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m it picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the Ts set point m it has two independent set points O alarm set point O tripping set point m when the protection is activated it detects whether the RTD is shorted or disconnected O RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than 35 C measurement displayed O RTD disconnection is detected if the measured
213. s back down below a value that allows restarting This value takes into account the heat rise produced by the motor when starting The inhibition function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection and the indication START INHIBIT informs the user Inhibition of the thermal overload protection function Tripping of the thermal overload protection function in the case of a motor may be locked out when required by the process by m logic input 126 m remote control order TC7 inhibit thermal overload protection Remote control order TC13 may be used to enable the operation of the thermal overload protection function Taking into account 2 transformer operating rates Power transformers often have two ventilation operating rates mg ONAN Oil Natural Air Natural m ONAF Oil Natural Air Forced The two groups of thermal overload protection parameters enable both of these operating rates to be taken into account Switching from one group of thermal settings to the other is controlled by logic input 126 Switching is carried out without any loss of the thermal Capacity used value Taking into account 2 motor operating rates Switching from one set of thermal settings to the other is controlled by m logic input 126 m overrun of a set point by the equivalent current The 2 groups of thermal overload protection parameters enable both operating rates to be taken into account Switching is carried out without any
214. s IEC 60255 21 3 2 2 Gn horizontal axes 1 Gn vertical axes De energized Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 2 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 z 27 Gn 11ms Jolts IEC 60255 21 20 60 0Ci C lt i lt C sti ttt 20Gn 16ms In operation Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Series 20 Ab 25 C Series 40 Ad Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Series 20 Bb 70 C Series 40 Bd Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 10 days 93 RH 40 C Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068 2 14 Nb 25 C to 70 C 5 C min Salt mist IEC 60068 2 52 Kb 2 Influence of corrosion IEC 60068 2 60 C 21 days 75 RH 25 C 0 5 ppm HS 1 ppm SO Gaz test 4 IEC 60068 2 60 21 days 75 RH 25 C 0 01 ppm H S 0 2 ppm SO 0 02 ppm NOs 0 01 ppm Cl In storage 4 Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Ab 25 C Exposuretodryheat IEC 60068 2 2 eB ee tO o gt o 70 C Continuous exposure to damp heat JEC60068 2 3 Ca gt 56days 93 RH 40 C Enclosure safety tests Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels closed except for rear panel IP20 NEMA Type 12 with gasket supplied Fire withstand IEC 60695 2 11 650 C with glow wire Electrical safety tests 1 2 50 us impulse wave IEC 60255 5 5 kV 2 Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255 5 Power frequency dielectric withstand JEC60255 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2kVdmn 8 EN 50263 m 89 336 CEE rig emaonelc Comptabi
215. s mdoules current or voltage input connectors and cords come in separate packages To identify a Sepam check the 2 labels on the right side panel of the base unit which describe the product s functional and hardware features m hardware reference and designation Model User Machine Interface Supply voltage DE50531 59607 amp 59606 Serial No 0312024 Sepam serie20 advanoed UMI 24 250V Origin France Sepam serie20 IHM avanc e 24 250V i aE oaao doar A TETN 10 UD XXX_JXX_XNT Schneider ff Electric m functional reference and designation 59620 Type of application English French 59609 C04 S10 UX S20 J33 XXX Schneider ff Electric Substation Sous station DE52239 Working language Additional information not given systematically Identification of accessories The accessories such as optional modules current or voltage connectors and connection cords come in separate packages identified by labels m example of MES114 module identification label Part number DE52259 59646 Serial No 0304169 10 inputs 4 outputs 24 250 VDC Origin France 10 entr es 4 sorties 24 250 VCC C23 CE MES114 Commercial reference gee asso soaa nn MAEN METI ALT 03146134FA Schneider ES Electric f Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Installation Equipment identification List of Sepam series 20 references Reference Designation 59603 59607 59608 59609 59611 59620
216. saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES114 or MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 1 to 20 Unit S Accuracy 0 5 sec Display format 3 significant digits s CEM PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Contents Setting ranges 3 2 Phase to phase undervoltage 3 4 ANSI code 27 Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check 3 5 ANSI code 27D 47 Remanent undervoltage 3 6 ANSI code 27R Phase to neutral undervoltage 3 7 ANSI code 27S Phase undercurrent 3 8 ANSI code 37 Temperature monitoring 3 9 ANSI code 38 49T Negative sequence unbalance 3 10 ANSI code 46 Excessive starting time locked rotor 3 12 ANSI code 48 51LR 14 Thermal overload 3 13 ANSI code 49RMS Phase overcurrent 3 22 ANSI code 50 51 Earth fault 3 24 ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G Phase to phase overvoltage 3 26 ANSI code 59 Neutral voltage displacement 3 27 ANSI code 59N Starts per hour 3 28 ANSI code 66 Recloser 3 29 ANSI code 79 Overfrequency 3 31 ANSI code 81H Underfrequency 3 32 ANSI code 81L Rate of change of frequency 3 33 ANSI code 81R General IDMT protection functions 3 34 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3
217. se 1 phase to neutral voltage m V2 phase 2 phase to neutral voltage m V3 phase 3 phase to neutral voltage It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 2 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Vnp 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 V or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp V3 2 at Vnp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Metering functions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Residual voltage Operation This function gives the value of the residual voltage VO V1 V2 V3 VO is measured m by taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages m by an open star delta VT It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 015 Vnp to 3 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 1 from 0 5 to 3 Vnp
218. se an electric cord to short circuit the contact that delivers logic data to the input m if the input supply voltage is not present apply a voltage supplied by the DC voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input being sure to comply with the suitable polarity and level m observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 software in the Input output indicator status screen m at the end of the test if necessary press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs Checking of logic output connection Procedure Check carried out using the Output relay test function activated via the SFT2841 software in the Sepam Diagnosis screen Only output O4 when used for the watchdog can be tested This function requires prior entry of the Parameter setting password m activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software m the activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds m observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the related switchgear if it is ready to operate and is powered or connect a voltmeter to the terminals of the output contact the voltage cancels itself out when the contact closes m at the end of the test if necessary press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs PCRED301005EN June 2005 Commissioning Validation of the complete protection chain Pri
219. sed in word mode or in bit mode The address of bit i 0 lt i lt F of address word J is then J x 16 i e g OCOO bitO C000 OCO00 bit 7 C007 5 8 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Synchronization zone Binary time year Binary time months days Binary time hours minutes Binary time milliseconds Word address 0002 0003 0004 0005 See time tagging of events chapter for data format Identification zone Manufacturer identification Equipment Marking equipment type Modbus version Application version Sepam check word Synthesis zone Command Extension address Word address 0006 0007 0008 0009 000A B 000C 000D 000E OOOF Data addresses and encoding Synchronization zone The synchronization zone is a table which contains the absolute date and time for the time tagging function Time messages should be written in a single block containing 4 words using function 16 write word Messages can be read word by word or by groups of words using function 3 Access Modbus function enabled Read write 3 16 Read 3 Read 3 Read 3 Identification zone The identification zone contains system type information pertaining to the identification of the Sepam equipment Some of the information in the identification zone is also found in the configuration zone at the address FCOOh Access Modbus function Format enabled Not managed Di DU D DdD D D D
220. sioning or to test the link Access Modbus function enabled read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 Configuration zone Format none init to O none init to O The configuration zone contains information pertaining to the hardware and software configuration of the Sepam Configuration zone Word address Access Modbus function Format enabled Modbus address FCOO R 3 slave no Sepam type MSB FCO1 R 3 1 hardware config LSB Coupler type MSB FC02 R 3 2 version LSB application identification Type of application FC10 15 R 3 ASCII 12 characters S20 M20 etc application version FC16 18 R 3 ASCII 6 characters application marking FC19 22 R 3 ASCII 20 characters 1 FCO1 word MSB 10h Sepam LSB hardware configuration 2 FC02 word MSB 01h Sepam LSB XY communicationversion X Y Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Option UD UX reserved MES114E DSM303 MSA141 MET148 2 MES114 MES108 MES114F UX model 0 0 Z X xX y y UX model 1 0 Z 0 xX X y y 3 or MET 148 x 1 if option included y 1 if option included exlusive options z 1 if Vac set up 5 12 ef Merlin Gerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Examples F E D Logic Word address 0105 inputs Bit address 105x TS1 to Word address 0101 TS16 16 15 14 Bit address 101x TS49 to Word address 0104 TS64 64 63 62 Bit address 104x TC1 to Word address 01F0 TC16 16 15 14 Bit address 1F0x STC1 to Word a
221. t are triggered m the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered m only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip Each Sepam is capable of sending and receiving blocking input orders except for motor Sepams 1 which can only send blocking input orders When a Sepam is triggered by a fault current m it sends a blocking input order to output O3 2 m it trips the associated circuit breaker if it does not receive a blocking input order on the blocking input logic input The sending of the blocking input lasts the time it takes to clear the fault It is interrupted after a time delay that takes into account the breaking device operating time and protection unit reset time This system minimizes the duration of the fault optimizes discrimination and guarantees safety in downgraded situations wiring or switchgear failure Pilote wire test The pilot wire test may be performed using the output relay test function 1 Motor Sepams are not affected by the receipt of a blocking input since they are designed for loads only 2 Default parameter setting 3 According to parameter setting and presence of an additional MES114 module PCRED301005EN June 2005 DE50375 DE50376 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Block diagram Sepam S20 and T20 2 overcurrent inst relay 1 group A output Oxx BI transmission O inst relay 2 group A o 2 gt 1
222. t transformer 1 A or 5 A secondary windings are connected to the CCA630 connector item B CCA630 connector The connector contains 3 interposing ring CTs with through primaries which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and Sepam The connector may be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT secondary circuits CCA630 wiring m open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals The shields may be removed if necessary to make wiring easier If removed they must be replaced after wiring m remove the bridging strap if necessary The strap links terminals 1 2 and 3 m connect the wires using 4 mm ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of 1 5 to 6 mm AWG 16 to AWG 10 m close the side shields m plug the connector into the 9 pin inlet on the rear panel item m tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam 6 12 Current transformers 1 A 5 A DE52150 S OSVSO OSOS S S 125 lt 9 Ai 1224 6 H a gt 114 I26 lt 10 I2 lt 8 123 lt 7 5 5 4 D 112 A 2 2 1 Dm 214 S SVOKCGOKVCVPOGCGOKSgGSOsgggs SKSOKSGKORVGOVggs S SSOKSg GSS SS S S MT10464 Sepam current inputs 1 Bridging strap supplied with the CCA630 MT10318
223. te time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT reset time 0 5to20s Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms confirmed instantaneous E inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is gt 0 3 In typically 35 ms E inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for Is lt 0 3 In typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 23 DE50244 DE50246 Protection functions Earth fault ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G Description The IsO setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 IsO The earth fault function comprises 4 independant oe lee e
224. temperature is greater than 205 C measurement displayed If an RTD fault is detected the set point output relays are inhibited the protection outputs are set to zero The RTD fault item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm message is generated Block diagram T lt 205 C 3 set point 1 5 RTD set point 2 RTD s fault Characteristics Ts1 and Ts2 set points C F Setting 0 C to 180 C 32 F to 356 F Accuracy 1 5 C 2 7 F Resolution 1 C 1 F Pick up drop out difference 3 C 0 5 Characteristic times Operation time lt 5 seconds 1 See connection of MET148 2 module chapter for accuracy derating according to wiring cross section PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 9 MT10550 MT10857 Protection functions Operation The negative sequence unbalance protection function m picks up if the negative sequence component of phase currents is greater than the operation set point m it is time delayed The time delay may be definite time or IDMT see curve The negative sequence current is determined according to the 3 phase currents 2 1 dpa Alu aise li 3X ita 12 al3 27 j witha e j If Sepam is connected to 2 phase current sensors only the negative sequence current is gt 1 z A fi x a213 J3 27 j2 witha e Both formulas are equivalent when there is no zero sequence current earth fault Definite t
225. the cursor upward 50 51 On o On Trip Curve 2 SIT Threshold 550 A Delay 600 ms on b5 S b gt 5N b gt 5IN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10812 When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the Y key is used to move the cursor downward 50 51 on o On Trip Curve e Threshold 550 A Delay 600 ms PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 7 17 MT10816 MT10817 Use Use of passwords Sepam has two 4 digit passwords m the first password symbolized by a key is used to modify the protection settings m the second password symbolized by two keys is used to modify the protection settings and all the general settings The 2 factory set passwords are 0000 Entry of passwords Press thee key to display the following screen passwords Gen Bra Press the key to position the cursor on the first digit O X XIX Scroll the digits using the cursor keys A V then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the key Do not use characters other than numbers 0 to 9 for each of the 4 digits When the password for your qualification level is entered press the V key to position the cursor on the box Press the amp key again to confirm When Sepam is in protection setting mode a key appears at the top of the display When Sepam is in parameter setting mode two keys appear at the top of the display thershold delay
226. the frames that are exchanged have the same structure Each message or frame contains 4 types of data Synchronization of exchanges number code zones check zone Any character that is received after a silence of more than 3 characters is considered as the beginning of a frame A silence of at least 3 characters must be left on the line between two frames Example at 9600 bauds this time is equal to approximately 3 milliseconds m slave number 1 byte this indicates the receiving Sepam 0 to FFh If it is equal to zero the request concerns all the slaves broadcasting and there is no reply message m function code 1 byte this is used to select a command read write bit word and to check that the reply is correct m data zones n bytes these zones contain the parameters relating to the function bit address word address bit value word value number of bits number of words m check zone 2 bytes this zone is used to detect transmission errors PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 5 3 PE50584 PE50583 Modbus communication Ei E Sees cms es cote ed bad B a al el a ed PE EEFI ELE Po a 0 ee He ee F b a m onm a m ule hesk os om olen smm m moon flO foe Se SFT2841 Sepam Configuration screen SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE949 5 4 ef Merlin Gerin Configuring the communication interfaces Access to configuration parameters
227. tion The thermal capacity used is related to the load The thermal capacity used measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity Saving of thermal capacity used When the protection unit trips the current thermal capacity used increased by 10 is saved The saved value is reset to 0 when the thermal capacity used has decreased sufficiently for the start inhibit time delay to be zero The saved value is used again after a Sepam power outage making it possible to start over with the temperature buildup that caused the trip 1 The 10 increase is used to take into account the average temperature buildup of motors when starting Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 800 Unit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical J Merlin Gerin 2 11 Machine operation assistance functions 2 12 Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping Remaining operating time before overload tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal Capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the d
228. tion number 1701 Setting CO N Or BR P co 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Data Recloser enabled or disabled Recloser inhibition by input 126 Number of cycles Recloser disengaging time delay Recloser inhibition time delay Reserved Cycle 1 activation mode Cycle 1 isolation time delay Reserved Cycle 2 activation mode Cycle 2 isolation time delay Reserved Cycle 3 activation mode Cycle 3 isolation time delay Reserved Cycle 4 activation mode Cycle 4 isolation time delay ANSI 81H Overfrequency Function number 1301 Setting 2 3 4to 8 Data Enabled or disabled Fs set point Tripping time delay Reserved ANSI 81L Underfrequency Function number 14xx Relay 1 xx 01 Relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data 1 Enabled or disabled 2 Fs set point 3 Tripping time delay 4to8 Reserved ANSI 81R Rate of change of frequency Function number 1601 Setting Data 1 Enabled or disabled 2 dFs dt set point 3 Tripping time delay 4to8 Reserved J Merlin Gerin Format Unit Q 1to4 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms Format Unit Q 0 1 Hz 10 ms Format Unit D 0 1 Hz 10 ms Format Unit 0 1 Hz s 10 ms PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication Presentation The disturbance recording function is used to record analog and logical signals during a time interval Sepam series 20 can store two records Eac
229. tion on the state of the electronic components and the integrity of the functions e g automatic tests diagnose the level of component polarization voltages the continuity of the analog value acquisition chain non alteration of RAM memory absence of settings outside the tolerance range and thereby guarantees a high level of availability Sepam is therefore ready to operate without requiring any additional qualification testing that concerns it directly Sepam commissioning tests The preliminary Sepam commissining tests may be limited to a commissioning check i e m checking of compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules during a preliminary general check m checking of the compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered with the setting sheets m checking of current or voltage input connection by secondary injection tests m checking of logic input and output connection by simulation of input data and forcing of output status m confirmation of the complete protection chain m checking of the connection of the optional MET148 2 and MSA141 modules The various checks are described further on General principles E all the tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated and the MV circuit breaker racked out disconnected and open all the tests are to be performed in the operating situation no wiring or setting changes even temporary changes to facilitate testing are allowed
230. tion purpose PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 2 3 Metering functions 2 4 Phase current Residual current Phase current Operation This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents m 1 phase 1 current m 2 phase 2 current m 3 phase 3 current It is based on RMS current measurement and takes into account harmonics up to number 17 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 In Unit A or KA Accuracy typically 1 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 In 5 if lt 0 3 In Display format 3 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 In Residual current Operation This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current 10 It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the S key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range Connection to 3 phase CT 0 1 to 1 5 Ind
231. to BI transmission earth fault inst relay 1 group A TO inst relay 2 group A mm y 2 group A Too2s inhibition of BI transmission BI transmission if fault is not cleared BI receipt overcurrent time time delayed relay 1 group B time delay settings time delayed relay 2 group B fee o te earth fault time 2 1 time delayed relay 1 group B z 1 tripping 01 time delayed relay 2 group B time delayed relay 1 group A time delayed relay 2 group A P lagie earth fault logic discrim gt 1 iscrimination time delayed relay 1 group A time delayed relay 2 group A o h fe vercurrent logic discrim eee time delay settings OO log Input 113 BI receipt Block diagram Sepam M20 2 overcurrent inst relay 1 group A inst relay 2 group A earth fault inst relay 1 group A inst relay 2 group A inhibition of BI overcurrent es transmission time delayed relay 1 group B time delayed relay 2 group B earth fault il time delayed relay 1 group B time delayed relay 2 group B tripping 1 According to parameter setting O3 by default 2 Instantaneous action inst corresponds to protection pick up signal information PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 4 9 Control and monitoring Disturbance recording triggering functions Switching of groups of settings Disturbance recording trigger Description The recording of analog and logic signals may be t
232. twork cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable O the network cable must be stripped O the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp m the interface is to be connected to connector oC on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green fittings m the interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC m the ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply not included in shielded cable Terminal block is used to connect the distributed power supply module PCRED301005EN June 2005 PE50024 DE51665 DE51666 Installation ACE937 fiber optic connection interface 88 1 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected ACE937 PCRED301005EN June 2005 ACE937 Fiber optic interface Function The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star system This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight 0 1 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Power supply Supplied by Sepam Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Fiber type Multimode glass Wavelength 820 nm infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum diameter aperture attenuation power available length of um NA dBm km dBm fiber
233. ty with earlier versions PCRED301005EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301005EN June 2005 Time tagging of events Description of event encoding An event is encoded in 8 words with the following structure Most significant byte Least significant byte Word 1 type of event 08 00 For remote annunciation internal data logic inputs Word 2 event address Refer to bit addresses 1000 to 105F Word 3 reserved 00 00 Word 4 falling edge disappearance or rising edge appearance 00 00 Falling edge 00 01 Rising edge Word 5 year 00 O to 99 year Word 6 month day 1 to 12 month Word 7 hours minutes 0 to 23 hours Word 8 milliseconds 0 to 59999 1 to 31 day 0 to 59 minutes J Merlin Gerin 5 19 DE50337 Modbus communication master computer network Architecture for internal synchronization via the communication network 5 20 ef Merlin Gerin Time tagging of events Synchronization Sepam accommodates two synchronization modes m internal via the network synchronization mode by the broadcasting of a time message frame via the communication network Slave number 0 is used for broadcasting m external synchronization mode via a logic input The synchronization mode is selected at the time of commissioning via SFT2841 Internal synchronization via the network mode The time message frame is used for both time setting and synchronization o
234. type of application and Sepam identification m any alarms present m any minor major faults present To access parameters settings and operation and maintenance information for a particular Sepam click on the icon for that Sepam SFT2841 then establishes a point to point connection with the selected Sepam J Merlin Gerin 7 11 Use UMI on front panel Presentation Basic UMI This UMI includes m 2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status O green on indicator device on o red SX indicator device unavailable initialization phase or detection of internal failure m 9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps fitted with a standard label with SFT2841 a customized label can be printed on a laser printer cn key for clearing faults and resetting m 1 connection port for the link with the PC CCA783 cord the connector is protected by a sliding cover b51 I gt gt 51 lo gt 51N lo gt gt 5iN ext 0 off lon Lie MT10276 Fixed or remote advanced UMI In addition to the basic UMI functions this version provides m a graphic LCD display for the display of measurements parameter protection settings and alarm and operating messages The number of lines size of characters and symbols are in accordance with the screens and language versions The LCD display retrolighting may be activated by pressing a key m a 9 key keypad with 2 operating modes O white keys for current operation 1 display of measurements
235. ulas are equivalent when there is no earth fault Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 10 to 500 Unit Ib Accuracy 2 Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical PCRED301005EN June 2005 ef Merlin Gerin 2 9 Network diagnosis functions 2 10 Disturbance recording Operation This function is used to record analog signal and logical states Record storage is activated according to parameter setting by a triggering event see Control and monitoring functions Disturbance recording triggering The stored event begins before the triggering event and continues afterwards The record comprises the following information m values sampled from the different signals m date m characteristics of the recorded channels The files are recorded in FIFO First In First Out type shift storage the oldest record is erased when a new record is triggered Transfer Files may be transferred locally or remotely m locally using a PC which is connected to the pocket terminal connector and has the SFT2841 software tool m remotely using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control system Recovery The signals are recovered from a record by means of the SFT2826 software tool
236. ule may only be connected at the end of the series The MSA141 module must be the first one connected to the Sepam unit For the configuration that uses the 3 optional modules comply with the wiring in the diagram below VVVVVVVVVVYVY R CCA772 VVVVVVVVVVVYV CCA612 CCA770 MSA141 MET148 2 module ACE949 2 2 wires or ACE959 4 wires or ACE937 fiber optic module PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 6 21 PE50021 DE51648 DE51649 Installation FERRE raw oes MET 148 2 temperature sensor module 1 70 mm with CCA77x cord connected MET148 2 6 22 MET148 2 Temperature sensor module Function The MET148 2 module may be used to connect 8 temperature sensors RTDs of the same type m Pt100 Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs according to parameter setting m 3 wire temperature sensors m asingle module for each Sepam series 20 base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 CCA772 or CCA774 cords 0 6 2 or 4 meters m 2 modules for each Sepam series 40 or series 80 base unit to be connected by CCA770 CCA772 or CCA774 cords 0 6 2 or 4 meters The temperature measurement e g in a transformer or motor winding is utilized by the following protection functions m thermal overload to take ambient termperature into account m temperature monitoring Characteristics Weight 0 2 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail 25 C to 70 C Same
237. unctions Rate of change of frequency ANSI code 81R Operation This function picks up when the rate of change of frequency ROCOF of the positive sequence voltage overshoots the set point If only one VT is connected U21 the function is inhibited It includes a definite time delay T Block diagram lt Fmax pa MT10877 time delayed a output signal pick up Characteristics dFs dt set point Setting 0 1 to 10 Hz s Resolution 0 1 Hz s Accuracy tripping 5 or 0 1 Hz s no tripping 3 or 0 05 Hz s Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 170 ms 130 ms typical Overshoot time lt 100 ms Reset time lt 100 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301005EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 33 Protection functions General Operation time depends on the type of protection phase current earth fault current Operation is represented by a characteristic curve m t f l curve for the phase overcurrent function m t f 10 curve for the earth fault function The rest of the document is based on t f l the reasoning may be extended to other variables I0 The curve is defined by m type standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse m current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve m time delay T which corresponds to the operation tim
238. unt the second thermal overload relay may be 7 motor cold curve used D The time constant in this case is in theory the shortest one however it should not a 400 EE A E be determined in the same way as that of the first relay E The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the S equivalent current leq exceeds the Is value set point current Ea Sepam hot curve lt starting at Un starting at 0 9 Un gt 1 1 2 I Ib 3 16 CE PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Cold curves for Es0 0 I Ib Es 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 1 00 0 6931 0 7985 0 9163 1 0498 1 2040 1 3863 1 6094 1 8971 2 3026 1 05 0 6042 0 6909 0 7857 0 8905 1 0076 1 1403 1 2933 1 4739 1 6946 1 9782 2 3755 3 0445 1 10 0 5331 0 6061 0 6849 0 7704 0 8640 0 9671 1 0822 1 2123 1 3618 1 5377 1 7513 2 0232 2 3979 3 0040 PCRED301005EN June 2005 1 15 0 4749 0 5376 0 6046 0 6763 0 7535 0 8373 0 9287 1 0292 1 1411 1 2670 1 4112 1 5796 1 7824 2 0369 2 3792 2 9037 1 20 0 4265 0 4812 0 5390 0 6004 0 6657 0 7357 0 8109 0 8923 0 9808 1 0780 1 1856 1 3063 1 4435 1 6025 1 7918 2 0254 2 3308 2 7726 1 25 0 3857 0 4339 0 4845 0 5379 0 5942 0 6539 0 7174 0 7853 0 8580 0 9365 1 0217 1 1147 1 2174 1 3318 1 4610 1
239. val For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is E if gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In In current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Block diagram pick up signal and to logic discrimination N DE50371 time delayed output a Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output l gt Is pick up signal MT10541 value of internal time delay counter lt lt _ _ gt Tf i lt gt 3 s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Protection functions Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50 51 m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output MT10527 gt Is pick up signal 1 tripping value of internal time delay counter a ne Characteristics Tripping curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list on previous page Is set point Setting Definite time 0 1 In lt Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps IDMT 0 1 In lt Is lt 2 4 In expressed in Amps Resolution 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 1 5 or 0 01 In Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 02 In Is x 100 Time delay T operation time at 10 Is Setting Defini
240. via the communication link m actual processing of the control and monitoring function m utilization of the processing results o activation of output relays to control an actuator O information sent to the facility manager by message and or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software by remote indication TS via the communication link Logic outputs Control matrix alr Messages PHASE FAULT Logic inputs and outputs The number of Sepam inputs outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used The 4 outputs included in the Sepam series 20 base unit may be extended by adding one MES114 modules with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays After selecting the MES114 type required by an application the logic inputs must be assigned to functions s MerlinGerin PCRED301005EN June 2005 Control and monitoring functions The symbols used in the different block diagrams describing the control and monitoring functions are defined on this page Logic functions Ba OR xX 10 ay z1 S az Equation S X Y Z AND DE50676 N x X n Equation S X x Y xZ E exclusive XOR DE50677 N x Xx Il i n S 1 if one and only one input is set to 1 S 1ifX Y 2Z 1 E Complement These functions may use the complement of one or more input values DE50678 x lt N Equation S X S 1 if X 0 Delay timers Two types of delay timers m on delay timer used to del
241. ys Memory time delay Isolation time delay Lockout time delay Accuracy Resolution cycle 1 cycle 2 cycle 3 cycle 4 2 or 25 ms 10 ms or 1 digit overcurrent 1 overcurrent 2 earth fault 1 earth fault 2 overcurrent 1 overcurrent 2 earth fault 1 earth fault 2 inst delayed inactive inst delayed inactive inst delayed inactive inst delayed inactive inst delayed inactive inst delayed inactive inst delayed inactive inst delayed inactive 0 05 to 300 s 0 05 to 300 s 0 05 to 300 s 0 05 to 300 s 0 05 to 300 s 0 05 to 300 s 1 If a protection function that is inactive in relation to the recloser leads to circuit breaker opening the recloser is inhibited PCRED301005EN June 2005 3 29 MT10879 MT10880 Protection functions Recloser ANSI code 79 Example 1 case of successful reclosing after the first cycle Activation with 300 ms time delayed O C protection i Instantaneous O C o g TL S 300 ms Time delayed O C Sy a S l 112 closed position E l l l l inhibition time delay CB open command o gy T oo 111 open position c Lile cycle 1 isolation time delay disengagement CB close command time delay Reclosing in o gy T progress TS35 cleared fault Reclosing A Message a successful TS37 i Example 2 case of definitive tripping after two cycles activated by 300 ms time delayed O C pr

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Frigidaire GSWS9719A Top Load Washer  PV systems - Ingenium Bedrijfsadvies  Aparelho de Pressão Arterial Digital Semi  12月1日号  LE GUIDE DU MOULAGE  Whirlpool 3ET16NK Refrigerator User Manual  Rapport annuel  315 04 00 Rev1 Folheto de Instruções Microondas MB20A  Speco Technologies VM15LCD Car Video System User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file